-----BEGIN PRIVACY-ENHANCED MESSAGE----- Proc-Type: 2001,MIC-CLEAR Originator-Name: webmaster@www.sec.gov Originator-Key-Asymmetric: MFgwCgYEVQgBAQICAf8DSgAwRwJAW2sNKK9AVtBzYZmr6aGjlWyK3XmZv3dTINen TWSM7vrzLADbmYQaionwg5sDW3P6oaM5D3tdezXMm7z1T+B+twIDAQAB MIC-Info: RSA-MD5,RSA, L/OUhsK5XL8EcHSASiubL/K4WlsAW89W39bHG7hn83oWKCX0IJN55K1eh9uBQpo3 gwTKlP6fivrcJkW4C2WIkA== 0001193125-05-059350.txt : 20050324 0001193125-05-059350.hdr.sgml : 20050324 20050324092508 ACCESSION NUMBER: 0001193125-05-059350 CONFORMED SUBMISSION TYPE: 20-F PUBLIC DOCUMENT COUNT: 9 CONFORMED PERIOD OF REPORT: 20041127 FILED AS OF DATE: 20050324 DATE AS OF CHANGE: 20050324 FILER: COMPANY DATA: COMPANY CONFORMED NAME: TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC CENTRAL INDEX KEY: 0001067944 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION: RETAIL-GROCERY STORES [5411] IRS NUMBER: 000000000 FISCAL YEAR END: 1130 FILING VALUES: FORM TYPE: 20-F SEC ACT: 1934 Act SEC FILE NUMBER: 333-09268 FILM NUMBER: 05700399 BUSINESS ADDRESS: STREET 1: ELIZABETH HOUSE STREET 2: DUKE STREET CITY: WOKING STATE: X0 ZIP: 00000 BUSINESS PHONE: 441277372916 MAIL ADDRESS: STREET 1: TM HOUSE ANDREWS ROAD STREET 2: BRENTWOOD ESSEX CM15 98 CITY: LONDON STATE: X0 ZIP: 00000 20-F 1 d20f.htm FORM 20-F ANNUAL REPORT FOR YEAR ENDED 27 NOVEMBER 2004 Form 20-F Annual Report for Year Ended 27 November 2004
Table of Contents

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

FORM 20-F

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ Registration statement pursuant to Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

or

 

x Annual report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

For the fiscal year ended November 27, 2004

 

or

 

¨ Transition report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

For the transition period from                     to

 

Commission file number 333-9268

 

TM Group Holdings PLC

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

England and Wales

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

 

TM House, Ashwells Road, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST, England

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class


 

Name of each exchange on which registered


None   None

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

 

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

 

11% Senior Notes Due May 15, 2008,

 

12¼% Senior Subordinated Notes Due May 15, 2008

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

Ordinary Shares of 1p each 21,234,550

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

 

Yes x No ¨

 

Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.

 

Item 17 ¨ Item 18 x

 



Table of Contents

TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company organised under the laws of England and Wales.

 

In this Annual Report on Form 20-F (the “Form 20-F”), references to the “Senior Notes” are to the 11% Senior Notes due May 15, 2008 and references to the “Senior Subordinated Notes” are to the 12¼ % Senior Subordinated Notes due May 15, 2008 (together with the Senior Notes, the “Notes”), each issued by the Company.

 

The Company publishes its Financial Statements in pounds sterling. In this Form 20-F, references to “pounds sterling” or “£” are to currency of the United Kingdom and references to “US dollars” or “$” are to United States currency. For the convenience of the reader, this Form 20-F contains translations of certain pounds sterling amounts into US dollars at the specified rates. These translations should not be construed as a representation that such pound sterling amounts actually represent such US dollar amounts or could be, or could have been, converted into US dollars at the rates indicated or at any other rate. On March 22, 2005, the Noon Buying Rate was $1.8997 = £1.00. See Item 3. “Key Information—Exchange Rates” for information regarding the rates of exchange between the US dollar and the pound sterling.

 

The Company’s Financial Statements included in this Form 20-F have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom (“UK GAAP”), which differ in certain respects from generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“US GAAP”) (see Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements). Unless otherwise stated herein, all financial information presented in this Form 20-F has been prepared in accordance with UK GAAP.

 

The Company’s fiscal year ends on the last Saturday in November each year. Thus, for example, “Fiscal 2004” refers to the fiscal year ended November 27, 2004. References in this Annual Report to a particular year are to the fiscal year unless otherwise indicated.

 


 

CAUTIONARY STATEMENT FOR PURPOSES OF THE “SAFE HARBOR” PROVISIONS OF THE UNITED STATES PRIVATE SECURITIES LITIGATION REFORM ACT OF 1995. This Annual Report on Form 20-F contains certain forward looking statements as defined in section 27A of the Securities Act and in section 21E of the United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934. These forward looking statements are accompanied by, and should be read in conjunction with, an explanation of factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed as such forward looking statements. By their nature, forward looking statements involve risk and uncertainty, and the factors described in the context of such forward looking statements, and other factors referred to in this Annual Report on Form 20-F, particularly in Item 4. “Information on the Company” and Item 5. “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects,” could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from those expressed in or implied by such forward looking statements. The Company is claiming the benefits of the safe harbor provisions referred to above.

 


 

The Company’s registered office is located at TM House, Ashwells Road, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST, England; telephone 011 44 1277 372916.

 

- 2 -


Table of Contents

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

Name


        Page

Table of Contents

        3

Part I

   4

Item 1.

  

Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers

   4

Item 2.

  

Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable

   4

Item 3.

  

Key Information

   4

Item 4.

  

Information on the Company

   14

Item 5.

  

Operating and Financial Review and Prospects

   29

Item 6.

  

Directors, Senior Management and Employees

   39

Item 7.

  

Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions

   42

Item 8.

  

Financial Information

   43

Item 9.

  

The Offer and Listing

   43

Item 10.

  

Additional Information

   43

Item 11.

  

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

   54

Item 12.

  

Description of Securities other than Equity Securities

   54

Part II

   55

Item 13.

  

Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies

   55

Item 14.

  

Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds

   55

Item 15.

  

Controls and Procedures

   55

Item 16.

  

[Reserved]

    

Item 16A.

  

Audit Committee Financial Expert

   55

Item 16B.

  

Code of Ethics

   55

Item 16C.

  

Principal Accountant Fees and Services

   56

Item 16D.

  

Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees

   56

Item 16E.

  

Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers

   56

Part III

   57

Item 17.

  

Financial Statements

   57

Item 18.

  

Financial Statements

   57

Item 19.

  

Exhibits

   58

 

- 3 -


Table of Contents

 

PART I

 

Item 1. Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers

 

Not applicable

 

Item 2. Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable

 

Not applicable

 

Item 3. Key Information

 

SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

 

The following selected consolidated financial data for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004, and at November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004, are derived from the Company’s audited financial statements included elsewhere in this Form 20-F. The selected consolidated financial data for the 52 weeks ended November 27, 1999 and November 25, 2000 and at November 27, 1999, November 25, 2000 and November 24, 2001, are derived from audited financial statements not included herein. These financial statements have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm.

 

The Company’s Financial Statements are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP which differs in certain respects from US GAAP. See Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements.

 

The selected financial data set forth overleaf should be read in conjunction with the Company’s Financial Statements and Item 5. “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

- 4 -


Table of Contents
     52 weeks ended

    53 weeks
ended


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 25,
2000


    November 24,
2001


    November 30,
2002


    November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Income Statement Data

                              

Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP

                              

Sales

                              

Retailing - ongoing

   672,197     661,050     664,461     635,453     619,849  

                - acquired

   —       —       —       —       21,670  

Discontinued operations

   199,221     42,792     —       —       —    
    

 

 

 

 

Total sales

   871,418     703,842     664,461     635,453     641,519  

Cost of sales

   (639,878 )   (524,220 )   (502,974 )   (472,952 )   (476,192 )

Selling and distribution costs

   (168,201 )   (136,368 )   (125,157 )   (127,968 )   (131,420 )

Administrative expenses

   (24,372 )   (19,740 )   (18,063 )   (15,882 )   (16,974 )

Business re-structuring

   —       —       (759 )   —       (1,236 )
    

 

 

 

 

Operating profit

   38,967     23,514     17,508     18,651     15,697  

Profit from discontinued operations

   —       —       —       —       1,573  

Profit on fixed asset disposals Profit on fixed asset disposals

   1,509     3,137     3,907     3,908     4,154  
    

 

 

 

 

Profit before interest, taxation and sale of businesses

   40,476     26,651     21,415     22,559     21,424  
    

 

 

 

 

Retailing - ongoing

   29,015     27,541     25,480     25,912     23,426  

                - acquired

   —       —       —       —       324  

Central costs

   (2,686 )   (2,993 )   (3,306 )   (3,353 )   (2,663 )
    

 

 

 

 

Total continuing operations

   26,329     24,548     22,174     22,559     21,087  

Discontinued operations

   14,147     2,103     —       —       1,573  

Business re-structuring

   —       —       (759 )   —       (1,236 )
    

 

 

 

 

Total profit before interest, taxation and sale of businesses

   40,476     26,651     21,415     22,559     21,424  
    

 

 

 

 

Profit on sale of businesses

   —       51,507     —       —       —    
    

 

 

 

 

Profit before interest and taxation

   40,476     78,158     21,415     22,559     21,424  

Net interest expense

   (36,135 )   (21,274 )   (20,532 )   (12,094 )   (8,426 )
    

 

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

   4,341     56,884     883     10,465     12,998  

Taxation

   (504 )   (605 )   (139 )   (2,021 )   (4,758 )
    

 

 

 

 

Profit for the period

   3,837     56,279     744     8,444     8,240  
    

 

 

 

 

Amounts in accordance with US GAAP

                              

Net (loss)/income for the period (i)

                              

Continuing operations

   (14,948 )   169     (5,163 )   1,872     (811 )

Discontinued operations

   12,507     63,273     —       —       1,573  
    

 

 

 

 

Total

   (2,441 )   63,442     (5,163 )   1,872     762  
    

 

 

 

 

 

(i) In calculating net (loss)/income in accordance with US GAAP, certain Company charges (such as interest expense) have not been allocated to the discontinued operations and instead have been wholly allocated to continuing operations, as management has not considered such allocation to be meaningful.

 

- 5 -


Table of Contents
     November 25,
2000


    November 24,
2001


    November 30,
2002


    November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Balance Sheet Data

                              

Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP

                              

Intangible assets – goodwill

   5,751     4,816     6,718     7,533     15,777  

Tangible assets

   74,650     53,880     50,826     47,728     45,747  

Inventories

   49,553     34,790     34,378     34,115     38,880  

Total current assets

   118,872     175,780     80,957     87,761     85,985  

Total assets

   199,273     234,476     138,501     143,022     147,509  

Long-term debt

   233,349     205,089     144,470     136,240     128,949  

Total debt

   235,144     205,379     144,470     136,240     128,949  

Capital stock

   212     212     212     212     212  

Shareholder’s deficit

   (166,215 )   (68,229 )   (89,635 )   (81,191 )   (72,859 )

Amounts in accordance with US GAAP

                              

Intangible assets

   109,966     75,067     72,736     73,858     80,846  

Tangible assets

   74,650     53,880     50,826     47,728     45,747  

Other non-current assets

   24,497     21,351     2,479     2,023     1,567  

Inventories

   49,553     34,790     34,378     34,115     38,880  

Total current assets

   118,872     178,394     87,301     95,005     93,809  

Total assets

   327,985     328,692     213,342     218,614     221,969  

Long-term debt

   238,790     209,113     146,949     138,263     130,516  

Total debt

   240,585     209,403     146,949     138,263     130,516  

Capital stock

   212     212     212     212     212  

Shareholder’s (deficit)/equity

   (47,861 )   15,911     (38,650 )   (34,865 )   (31,133 )

Number of equity shares (000s)

   21,235     21,235     21,235     21,235     21,235  

 

Exchange Rates

 

The following table sets out, for the periods and dates indicated, certain information regarding the Noon Buying Rate for pounds sterling, expressed in US dollars per £1.00.

 

Fiscal Year


   At Period End

   Average(1)

   High

   Low

2000

   1.3997    1.5224    1.6520    1.3997

2001

   1.4095    1.4416    1.5045    1.3730

2002

   1.5515    1.4892    1.5915    1.4874

2003

   1.7101    1.6304    1.7219    1.5500

2004

   1.8817    1.8118    1.9073    1.7200

 

     High

   Low

September 2004

   1.8105    1.7733

October 2004

   1.8404    1.7790

November 2004

   1.9073    1.8323

December 2004

   1.9482    1.9125

January 2005

   1.9058    1.8647

February 2005

   1.9249    1.8570

March 2005 (through March 22, 2005)

   1.9292    1.8997

(1) The average of the Noon Buying Rates on the last trading day of each full month during the fiscal year.

 

The Noon Buying Rate is the City of New York rate for cable transfers in pounds sterling as announced by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. On March 22, 2005, the latest practicable date prior to filing this report, the rate was $1.8997 = £1.00. The US dollar liability under the Senior Notes has been translated at $1.8817 = £1.00 being the representative US dollar/UK sterling exchange rate on November 27, 2004 (November 29, 2003 $1.7101 - £1.00, November 30, 2002 $1.5515 = £1.00).

 

- 6 -


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

 

Substantial Leverage and Debt Service Requirements

 

As of November 27, 2004, the Company’s consolidated long-term indebtedness, calculated in accordance with UK GAAP, was £128.9 million. In addition, the Company and its subsidiaries may incur additional indebtedness in the future, subject to limitations imposed by the Indentures and the instruments governing the Company’s other indebtedness.

 

While the Company’s profit before interest and taxation for its continuing business has been reasonably stable in each of the last three years, its ability to improve its operating performance and financial results will depend upon economic, financial, competitive and other factors beyond its control, including fluctuations in interest rates and general economic conditions in the United Kingdom. There can be no assurance that the Company will generate sufficient cash flow from operations in the future to service the debt of the Company. If the Company is unable to generate sufficient operating cash flow in the future to service its debt, it may be required to sell assets or to obtain additional financing. There can be no assurance that any such sales of assets or additional financing could be achieved.

 

The level of debt of the Company will have several important effects on its future operations, including the following: (a) the Company will have significant cash requirements to service debt, reducing funds available for operations and future business opportunities, including strategic acquisitions, and increasing the vulnerability of the Company to adverse general economic and industry conditions; (b) the Company may be restricted in the future from obtaining additional financing, whether for acquisitions, C-store conversions, tobacco pre-purchases or other competitive activity and working capital or other purposes; and (c) the Company will be required to comply with restrictions contained in the Indentures and the instruments governing the Company’s working capital facilities.

 

In December 2004, the Company renewed its agreement with HBOS (formerly the Bank of Scotland) for the granting of working capital facilities of £20 million, as permitted by covenants in the Notes. This agreement grants HBOS a charge over certain assets of the Company as security. HBOS permit this facility to be renewed annually although the Company has recently chosen to extend this facility for shorter periods in order to maximise its flexibility. The most recent renewal was for a period of six months.

 

Holding Company Structure, Subordination and Other Considerations

 

The Holding Company has no operations of its own. As a result, it is wholly dependent on dividends and inter-company payments (either advances or repayments) from its subsidiaries, the payment of which is limited by law. In addition, the ability of the Company’s subsidiaries to pay dividends and make inter-company advances to the Company depends on their earnings. The Company’s subsidiaries have no obligation, contingent or otherwise, to pay any amounts due under the Notes or to make funds available to the Company to enable it to pay any amounts due under the Notes. Generally, claims of creditors of a subsidiary, including trade creditors, secured creditors and creditors holding indebtedness and guarantees issued by the subsidiary, and claims of preference shareholders (if any) of the subsidiary, will have priority with respect to the assets and earnings of the subsidiary over the claims of the creditors of its parent company. The Notes therefore are effectively subordinated to creditors (including trade creditors) and preference shareholders (if any) of its direct and indirect subsidiaries. As of November 27, 2004, the Company had approximately £87.4 million of such liabilities, including £57.7 million due to trade creditors.

 

The Senior Subordinated Notes are also contractually subordinated in right of payment to the Senior Notes. In the event of a winding up of the Company, the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on, the Senior Subordinated Notes is subordinated in right of payment, as set forth in the Senior Subordinated Note Indenture, to the prior payment in full in cash or cash equivalents of all amounts due in respect of the Senior Notes. Accordingly, if any distribution is made in the winding up of the Company to the Senior Subordinated Note Trustee or to holders of Senior Subordinated Notes at a time when not all amounts due in respect of the Senior Notes have been paid in full in cash or cash equivalents, the Senior

 

- 7 -


Table of Contents

Subordinated Note Trustee or the holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes, as the case may be, are required to hold such distribution in trust for the holders of the Senior Notes and to pay it over to the Senior Note Trustee on behalf of the holders of the Senior Notes as their interests may appear.

 

The ability of the direct and indirect subsidiaries of the Company to pay dividends and make other payments to the Company may be restricted by, among other things, applicable corporate and other laws and regulations and by the terms of agreements to which such companies become subject.

 

Rights of Secured Creditors under Insolvency Laws

 

The procedural and substantive provisions of UK insolvency and administrative laws generally are more favourable to secured creditors than comparable provisions of US law and afford debtors and unsecured creditors only limited protection from the rights of secured creditors. As a result, the ability of the holders of the Notes to protect their interests in the Company may be more limited than under US laws. Under UK insolvency law, the liabilities of the Company in respect of the Notes would be paid in the event of a liquidation or similar proceeding after payment of all secured indebtedness of the Company and certain other creditors which are entitled to priority under UK law. The latter include creditors in respect of (i) amounts owed to the UK Inland Revenue, (ii) amounts owed to UK Customs and Excise in respect of value added tax and certain other taxes and duties, (iii) amounts owed in respect of UK social security contributions, (iv) amounts owed in respect of occupational pension schemes and (v) certain amounts owed to employees.

 

Reduced Demand for Tobacco Products - Relaxation on Personal Imports

 

The Company is a significant retailer of tobacco products in the United Kingdom, with tobacco accounting for approximately 29 per cent of its revenues from continuing operations in Fiscal 2004. The tobacco industry, both in the United Kingdom and abroad, has faced, and continues to face, a number of issues that may adversely affect demand for tobacco products, the volume of sales, operating revenues, cash flows, operating profit and financial position of the Company. In the United Kingdom, these issues include: actual and proposed regulatory controls at both the EU and UK level, excise tax increases, proposed governmental and voluntary private bans and restrictions on smoking (including in places and in buildings permitting public access), recent actual restrictions on tobacco marketing, advertising and sales, increased assertions of adverse health effects associated with both smoking and exposure to environmental tobacco smoke (“ETS”), legislation or other governmental action seeking to ascribe to tobacco manufacturers responsibility for any adverse health effects associated with both smoking and exposure to ETS, the diminishing social acceptance of smoking, increased pressure from anti-smoking groups, unfavourable press reports, governmental investigations, and increased smoking and ill-health litigation, including private plaintiff class action litigation. See “—Effect of UK Government Tobacco Regulation and UK Litigation” and “Item 4. Information on the Company—Regulation and Litigation”.

 

Cigarettes and other tobacco products are subject to substantial duties in the United Kingdom and in general, these duties and other cigarette-regulated taxes levied by the government have been increasing. Currently, these duties and taxes represent up to 80 per cent of the recommended retail price for such products sold in the United Kingdom. In the Company’s experience, past increases in duties and similar taxes have had an adverse effect on sales of cigarettes. In October 2002, the UK Government relaxed its guideline restrictions on the personal imports of tobacco products. Any future increases in duties and taxes or further relaxation of import restrictions, the extent of which cannot be predicted, could result in sales volume declines for the cigarette industry, and might cause the Company’s sales of tobacco products to shift from the premium segment to the discount segment on which the retailers earn a lower margin. See “Item 4. Information on the Company—The Tobacco Market”.

 

Although it is difficult to predict the precise nature of any future legislation or litigation in the United Kingdom, or regulation at EU level, the Company believes that the various existing restrictions and regulations, in particular the significant increase in regulatory activity in the last few years, together with substantial increases in excise duties on smoking tobacco products, have had, and are likely to continue to

 

- 8 -


Table of Contents

have, a detrimental effect on the sales of tobacco products. Given the fact that tobacco related products account for such a high proportion of the Company’s total revenues, any substantial decrease in sales of tobacco products may have a material adverse effect on the turnover, profit and financial condition of the Company. Future profitability will depend on how the Company manages any decreases in revenues due to reduced sales of tobacco products and how it continues to maintain its operating margins, despite any such decrease in sales. See “Item 4. Information on the Company—Regulation and Litigation”.

 

Effect of UK Government Tobacco Regulation and UK Litigation

 

Reports with respect to the possible harmful physical effects of cigarette smoking have been publicised for many years, and the sale, promotion and use of cigarettes continues to be subject to increasing governmental regulation in the United Kingdom and the European Union. The UK Government has an aim to reduce smoking in the United Kingdom and, on December 10, 1998, the Government issued a position paper known as a “White Paper” (“Smoking Kills—A White Paper on Tobacco”) (“the White Paper”) that set out a concerted programme of action to achieve this aim. The Government has invested and continues to invest in a number of initiatives to implement its plan of action, such as media campaigns designed to shift attitudes and programmes to help smokers quit smoking.

 

The Government is continuing its comprehensive strategy on reducing smoking and improving public health. Most recently, at the beginning of March 2004, the Government began a new consultation process on improving public health, one of the central tenets of which is the reduction of levels of smoking. As a result of this, the UK Government published another White Paper on 16 November 2004. Although it does not propose an outright ban, the paper sets out a schedule for banning smoking in most public places and workplaces in order to protect the welfare of others. Exemptions are proposed for pubs that do not serve food and private clubs. Smoking “in the bar area” will be prohibited everywhere.

 

A number of substantial restrictions on the marketing, advertising, product design and consumption of cigarettes have been introduced by Government regulation. For example, the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002 came into force on February 14, 2003. The Act makes it an offence to: publish tobacco advertisements in the United Kingdom; devise or distribute a tobacco advertisement in the United Kingdom, whether in electronic or other form; display tobacco products or their prices in a place or website where tobacco products are offered for sale if the display does not comply with such requirements as may be specified in regulations; distribute free to the public any product or coupon with the purpose of promoting a tobacco product; be a party to a sponsorship agreement if the purpose or effect of that agreement is to promote tobacco products in the United Kingdom. Supplementary regulations have been created to consolidate, develop and strengthen this legislation and it is anticipated that advertising and sponsorship will be largely prohibited by 2006.

 

Legislative restrictions on the marketing, advertising, product design and consumption of cigarettes have had an adverse impact on the Company’s results of operations in recent years and are expected to continue to adversely affect results of operations in the future.

 

Parties seeking damages for illnesses claimed to have resulted from tobacco consumption have sued tobacco manufacturers in the United Kingdom, including the Company’s suppliers. The Company is not a party to any smoking and related ill-health litigation in any jurisdiction. However, there can be no guarantee that such actions will not arise in the future. In addition, although the Company is currently only a retailer of tobacco products, previous sales of cigarettes under Forbuoys’ own brand name and, with the acquisition of Dillons Stores Limited in August 2004, current sales of cigarettes under own brand names, although all manufactured by another company, as well as the Company’s activities as a tobacco retailer, could potentially subject the Company to future litigation. See “Item 4. Information on the Company—Regulation and Litigation”.

 

It is difficult to determine the precise impact of regulatory initiatives or the outcome of any related litigation, or to predict precisely what further other EU or UK legislation, regulations, directives or initiatives

 

- 9 -


Table of Contents

will be implemented or adopted relating to the manufacturing, advertising, sale or use of cigarettes, or to the tobacco industry generally. However, recent legislation is likely to affect the Company and, in particular, if any or all of the current initiatives were to be implemented, the volume, operating revenues, cash flows and operating profit of the Company could be materially adversely affected, in amounts that cannot be determined.

 

Competition

 

The markets in which the Company operates in the United Kingdom are highly competitive. The Company competes with a broad array of stores, supermarkets, petrol retailers, high street shops and food and beverage service providers. The Company has from time to time experienced significant competitive pressures from competitors in the businesses in which it operates. As a result, the Company’s ability to increase prices is limited.

 

The Company’s competitors have varying abilities to withstand changes in market conditions. Some of its competitors are divisions of larger companies with greater financial and other resources than the Company. The Company’s ability to compete effectively will require continuous efforts by the Company in the development of its store portfolio, cost rationalisations and investment in technology. As described above (see “— Substantial Leverage and Debt Service Requirements”), the Company will be limited in its ability to incur additional indebtedness and there can be no assurance that the Company will have sufficient financial resources to respond to these competitive pressures or that it will be successful in otherwise realising or maintaining any of its competitive advantages.

 

Reliance on Distributors and Manufacturers

 

The Company’s arrangements with its distributors are evidenced by written agreements with general terms. TM Retail has secured long-term contracts with Palmer & Harvey McLane Limited, which provides many of the products sold in its stores, Imperial Tobacco Group PLC for tobacco gantries and Carlton Cards for its greeting cards. To date, the Company has not experienced the cancellation of any significant supply or distribution contract. However, there can be no assurance that distributors will not terminate their relationships with the Company or that the Company’s suppliers or distributors will continue to provide trade credit or to renew or continue their contracts on terms as favourable as those currently in effect.

 

Integration of Acquisitions

 

During Fiscal 2004 a subsidiary of the Company acquired the entire share capital of Dillons Stores Limited that operates 181 newsagent stores. The Company and its subsidiaries may make other acquisitions in the future as part of its business strategy. Such acquisitions are made on the basis of achieving certain benefits for the whole business within an anticipated time-frame. However, failure to adequately manage the integration processes and co-ordinate the strategies of the newly acquired entities may affect the Company’s operating profit.

 

Control of Company; Potential Conflict of Interests

 

The Institutional Investors (as defined herein) own all of the outstanding “B” ordinary shares and 97.7 per cent of the outstanding “C” ordinary shares of Thistledove (see Item 7 “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”), constituting approximately 72 per cent of the current issued ordinary share capital of Thistledove. They have the ability to exercise control over the Board of Directors of the Company. In addition, the Institutional Investors have the right to appoint at least two Directors of Thistledove. In the event that circumstances arise in which the interests of the Institutional Investors or the shareholders of Thistledove as a whole conflict with the holders of the Notes, such as if Thistledove were to encounter financial difficulties or were unable to pay its debts as they mature, the holders of the Notes could be disadvantaged by the actions that the Institutional Investors may seek to pursue. In addition, the shareholders and management may cause the Company to pursue acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that could enhance the value of their equity investment, even though such transactions might involve risks to the holders of the Notes.

 

- 10 -


Table of Contents

Dependence on Certain Employees

 

Each of the Company’s executive officers has responsibility for an important segment of the Company’s operations. The loss of any such person’s services could be detrimental to the Company’s operations, although the Company believes that, subject to the need to review and improve internal controls and systems discussed immediately below, it has adequate depth at all levels of management. To ensure continuity of management, the Company has entered into a service agreement with Mr. Lancaster, and has obtained “Key Man” life insurance policies on Mr Lancaster.

 

Issues regarding Internal Controls

 

In January 2005, the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm, Ernst & Young LLP, reported to TM Group Holdings PLC’s audit committee and management that Ernst & Young LLP considered that there was insufficient knowledge and experience of US GAAP in the Company’s corporate accounting department and that Ernst & Young considered this matter to be a reportable condition (as defined under standards adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board) representing a material weakness in the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting. Ernst & Young LLP has provided an unqualified audit report on the Company’s financial statements for Fiscal 2002 and Fiscal 2003.

 

In order to address this weakness, management are currently reviewing their resources and considering the changes necessary to remediate this deficiency and to improve the US GAAP reporting process. Options being considered include establishing procedures for the necessary periodic updates by external accounting advisors.

 

During the period of remediation, there can be no assurance that additional reportable conditions in the Company’s internal controls will not be discovered. Any failure to remediate the material weakness identified in Item 15 of this Annual Report or implement required new or improved controls, or difficulties encountered in their implementation, could cause the Company to fail to meet its reporting obligations relating to reconciliation of its financial statements to US GAAP.

 

Uncertainty of United Kingdom Participation in European Monetary Union

 

Pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Community (as amended by the Treaty on European Union) (the “Treaty”), European economic and monetary union (“EMU”) occurred in three stages, the third of which began on January 1, 1999, when the value of the European Currency Unit (the “ecu”) as against the currencies of the member states participating in the third stage was irrevocably fixed and the ecu became a currency in its own right. The European Council named this currency the “euro”.

 

If the United Kingdom joins EMU, outstanding Senior Subordinated Notes will be re-denominated and/or become payable in euros. Any re-denomination will be effected in accordance with applicable law. The United Kingdom is not currently participating in EMU and it is not clear whether or on what terms the United Kingdom would be permitted to participate at some later time. The current policy of the UK Government is that any decision to join EMU will only be taken after a national referendum. There can be no prediction as to whether the United Kingdom will participate in EMU or as to the rate of exchange at which pounds sterling would be converted into euros, if at all. In addition, there can be no determination as to the likely impact on the rate of exchange between pounds sterling and US dollars of a decision by the United Kingdom to decline participation in EMU.

 

- 11 -


Table of Contents

Foreign Exchange Risks

 

The Company will make payments in respect of the Senior Subordinated Notes in pounds sterling (or euros, should the United Kingdom join EMU). Fluctuations in the exchange rate between pounds sterling (or the euro, as the case may be) and US dollars may therefore adversely affect the US dollar equivalent of any pound sterling or euro denominated payments made in respect of the Senior Subordinated Notes.

 

Currency Translation Risks Relating to the Senior Notes

 

As a result of US dollar denominated borrowings of $145 million and interest payments thereon, the Company’s balance sheet and profit and loss account can be significantly affected by movements in the US dollar/sterling exchange rates. The Company has partially mitigated the effect of this currency exposure by purchasing options to buy US dollars. In managing its currency exposures, the Company’s objectives are to maintain a low cost of borrowing and to retain some potential for currency-related appreciation while hedging against currency depreciation.

 

Since May 1998, the Company acquired a series of options, exercisable on May 13, 2003, to purchase US dollars at a rate between $1.55 = £1.00 and $1.60 = £1.00. The level of US borrowings covered by the options was $150 million. These options were not exercised and therefore lapsed during the period ended November 29, 2003.

 

On May 14, 2003, the Company acquired an option, exercisable on November 13, 2003, to purchase US dollars at the rate of $1.55 = £1.00 which covered US borrowings of $125 million. At the expiration of this option, the Company acquired a replacement option, exercisable on March 15, 2004, to purchase US dollars at the rate of $1.59 = £1.00 which also covered US borrowings of $125 million.

 

Subsequent options to purchase $145 million were acquired as follows:

 

    In March 2004 expiring July 2004 at the rate of $1.7025 = £1

 

    In July 2004 expiring January 2005 at the rate of $1.6930 = £1

 

These options were not exercised and therefore lapsed at their expiry date above.

 

Subsequent to the year end, in January 2005, an option was acquired to purchase $145 million at the rate of $1.7380 = £1.00. This option will expire July 4, 2005.

 

The Company had also entered into forward foreign currency contracts for the purchase, at rates varying from $1.5891 = £1.00 to $1.6177 = £1.00, or US dollar amounts equal to the total of the first ten half-yearly interest payments on the senior notes, for settlement on each interest payment date between November 1998 and May 2003. These forward foreign currency contracts were accounted for as hedges in accordance with the Company’s accounting policy and expired in May 2003. In October and November 2003, further forwards currency contracts at rates of $1.6459 = £1.00 and $1.67 = £1.00 were taken out and used for the November 2003 interest payment on the senior notes. There were no outstanding contracts at the period end November 29, 2003 or November 27, 2004 and therefore no unrecognised gains or losses.

 

The Company could still be exposed to material currency translation fluctuation in relation to the uncovered US borrowings of $297,000, the half yearly interest payments on the senior notes and, in any event, upon the expiration of the remaining option on July 4, 2005. The Company will continue to review its hedging arrangements and may amend them if it can do so on commercially attractive terms.

 

Pension obligations

 

According to recent actuarial valuations, the projected liabilities of the Company’s pension schemes exceed the projected realisable value of their assets. This has already impacted on cash flows and is expected to do so in the future.

 

- 12 -


Table of Contents

National Minimum Wage

 

The introduction of the national minimum wage in 2000 by the UK Government has already had an adverse impact on the Company’s operating costs. Further imposed increases could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position and earnings.

 

Sub-Post Offices

 

The UK Government is phasing in changes to the means by which it dispenses pensions and benefits, which could lead to reduced customer levels at Post Offices located in the Company’s stores. These Post Offices are perceived to have a beneficial effect on the Company’s financial position through the ‘footfall’ they create. Any scaling down of these activities could adversely affect the Company’s financial position and earnings.

 

- 13 -


Table of Contents
Item 4. Information on the Company

 

History and Development

 

TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company organised under the laws of England and Wales. It operates a leading nation-wide chain of newsagents, variety and convenience stores and, until Fiscal 2001, was the largest specialist cigarette, beverage and snack vending company in the United Kingdom. Its registered office is located at TM House, Ashwells Road, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST, England; telephone 011 44 1277 372916. The Company’s agent in the United States is CT Corporation System, 111 Eighth Avenue, New York, NY 10011; telephone (212) 894 8570.

 

The Company was incorporated on November 7, 1997 and used in 1998 as a vehicle for re-financing a company originally formed in 1995 upon a management buy-out (the “MBO”) of the principal retailing and vending businesses of Gallaher Group PLC (“Gallaher”). Following the MBO, the Company streamlined its operations and focused on increasing profitability in its three businesses, TM Retail (newsagents, variety and convenience stores), Mayfair Services (cigarette vending) and Vendepac (beverage and snack vending). Significant acquisitions were made for each business.

 

Following the disposal of the tobacco and beverage vending businesses during Fiscal 2001 and the redemption of debt in both Fiscal 2001 and Fiscal 2002, the Company is now focused on opportunities in the retailing market.

 

The Management Buy-Out

 

On July 24, 1995, TM Group Limited acquired from Gallaher the entire issued share capital of Forbuoys, Marshell Group Limited and Vendepac Services Limited in an MBO backed by the Institutional Investors as defined herein (see Item 7. “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”). The opportunity for the MBO arose from Gallaher’s decision to refocus its operations by divesting its vending and retail businesses, along with all other assets Gallaher considered non-core to its principal business of cigarette manufacture. Financing for the MBO was provided by a combination of secured debt financing by a syndicate of banks, unsecured loan notes sold to the Institutional Investors, and a loan convertible into preferred ordinary shares and redeemable cumulative preference shares. The remainder of the purchase price was raised through the sale of ordinary shares to management and preferred ordinary shares and redeemable preference shares to the Institutional Investors. The remaining amount of this indebtedness, as well as the capital structure of the Company, was replaced as a result of the May 1998 Recapitalisation (see Note 1 of Notes to the Financial Statements).

 

Acquisitions

 

The Company has made several strategic acquisitions since the MBO, its strategy depending on the availability of suitable acquisition candidates, financing on acceptable terms and the Company’s ability to comply with the restrictions, if any, contained in its debt agreements (including the Indentures). As part of its strategy the Company will evaluate potential acquisition candidates and expects to pursue strategic acquisitions in the future. During Fiscal 2004 a subsidiary of the Company acquired the entire share capital of Dillons Stores Limited, comprising 181 newsagent stores. (See “ - CTN, V-store and C-store Market”).

 

Disposals

 

Following a strategic review, the Company sold the cigarette vending operation of Mayfair Services and the beverage and snack vending operation of Vendepac during Fiscal 2001. The aggregate consideration for both totalled approximately £125 million.

 

- 14 -


Table of Contents

Capital Expenditure

 

There are currently no capital expenditure projects in progress other than those of a routine nature that are funded out of normal operating cash flow.

 

For Fiscal 2002, 2003 and 2004 the Company’s gross capital expenditure including small acquisitions was £11.2 million, £11.4 million and £12.6 million respectively. In addition, the acquisition of Dillons Stores Limited in Fiscal 2004 gave rise to £6.9 million of expenditure (net of cash acquired), with a further £6.3 million deferred. Expenditure connected with the refit, conversion or acquisition of stores excluding Dillons totalled respectively £7.3 million, £7.2 million and £7.4 million. The remainder was routine replacement of vehicles and equipment.

 

Business Overview

 

According to “Verdict on Neighbourhood Retailing”, published by Verdict Research Limited, TM Retail is the eighth largest neighbourhood retailer in the United Kingdom (based on share of sales). In Fiscal 2004, TM Retail generated profit before central costs, interest and tax of £24.1 million on sales of £641.5 million. It employed approximately 10,700 people and operated 1,327 stores as at November 27, 2004, comprising 307 Convenience stores (“C-stores”), 121 Variety stores (“V-stores”) and 899 Newsagents (“CTNs”).

 

TM Retail was formed on November 28, 1998, when Forbuoys acquired the shares of Tog Limited, the parent company of Martin Retail Group, for a total cash payment (including repayment of debt) of £75 million. The Company has retained the brand names of Forbuoys and Martin, based primarily in England and Wales, and R S McColl, the brand name under which Martin operated in Scotland.

 

TM Retail has continued to convert CTNs to C-stores to take advantage of the higher sales and margins from C-stores and the opportunities created by the recent changes in traditional retailing in the United Kingdom, adopting the McColls name (See “- CTN, V-store and C-store Market”).

 

On August 21, 2004, Forbuoys acquired Dillons Stores Limited (“Dillons”), from Tesco plc, comprising 181 newsagent stores.

 

Business Strategy

 

Management will continue to pursue the C-store conversion programme focusing on those of its 899 CTN locations that demonstrate the greatest potential for success as C-stores.

 

The Company continues to appraise the likely opportunities within its CTN estate. CTNs provide valuable cash generation where viable. Marginal performers can be sold or closed. The Company is currently running a programme of CTN disposals.

 

As a further development of the segmentation of its estate, management has classified 121 stores as V-stores. These are generally larger than average, generally high street-based and require a broader product range.

 

- 15 -


Table of Contents

Operations

 

Established in 1935, Forbuoys expanded principally by opening shops on new public housing developments and in residential areas, retailing primarily confectionery, tobacco products and newspapers. At the time of the MBO, Forbuoys had 701 stores.

 

Following the MBO, and prior to the Martin acquisition, a total of 64 net loss making branch closures had taken place. Store numbers increased by a further 781 in 1998 with the acquisition of Martin. There was a net reduction of 222 stores between the beginning of Fiscal 1999 and the end of Fiscal 2003. Reasons for reduction vary from overlaps (eg between a Forbuoys and a Martin store), or closures of stores operating at a loss, to the related sale and purchase of stores with other C-store operators. In Fiscal 2004, 181 stores were acquired with Dillons, and the store base increased by net 131 stores in the year.

 

The following table sets out the total number of stores for the relevant periods.

 

     TM Retail

     Fiscal
2000


   Fiscal
2001


   Fiscal
2002


  

Fiscal

2003


  

Fiscal

2004


Beginning of period

   1,353    1,291    1,230    1,213    1,196

End of period

   1,291    1,230    1,213    1,196    1,327

Weighted average for the fiscal year

   1,318    1,247    1,224    1,204    1,222

 

TM Retail supplies everyday needs to a large customer base and records approximately six million transactions per week. It is one of the largest operators of National Lottery terminals, the largest independent Post Office operator and has the biggest home news delivery service in the United Kingdom.

 

TM Retail’s sales are affected by seasonal and special events, such as Christmas, Easter, Valentine’s Day and Halloween. Stores sell fireworks for “Guy Fawkes” night (November 5), the Company being one of the largest retailers of fireworks in the United Kingdom.

 

The principal product lines in TM Retail stores as an approximate percentage of sales were as follows:

 

     Fiscal
2002


   Fiscal
2003


  

Fiscal

2004


     %    %    %

News

   26    27    29

Tobacco

   30    30    29

Confectionery/Soft Drinks

   14    16    16

Grocery

   7    8    9

Non-Food/Stationery (1)

   19    14    12

Lottery “Instants”

   3    4    4

Lottery on-line commissions

   1    1    1
    
  
  
     100    100    100
    
  
  

(1) Includes, among other products, greeting cards, toys, fireworks, stationery and phonecards.

 

Most of TM Retail’s CTNs and V-stores operate between the hours of 6.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m. for six days a week and 7.00 a.m. to noon on Sundays. Most of TM Retail’s C-stores operate between the hours of 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m. for seven days a week. Opening hours are reviewed on a store-by-store basis, and may vary depending upon local factors. Government legislation in England and Wales limits stores with retail space of more than 3,000 sq. ft. to a Sunday opening time of not more than six hours (a restriction that only applies to 14 TM Retail stores).

 

- 16 -


Table of Contents

CTN, V-store and C-store Market

 

The traditional CTN is essentially a newsagent located in a residential area or local shopping centre, which sells newspapers and magazines, tobacco products and confectionery. A V-store is typically a larger store, located in a shopping centre, selling traditional CTN products as well as a broader range of goods such as greetings cards, toys, books and stationery.

 

Over recent years, convenience stores have increased in importance in the retail market in the United Kingdom. Competitive pressures have led to the closure of many small specialist retailers such as butchers, bakers and greengrocers. C-stores have developed to fulfil the community needs left by these closures. Smaller family units, less leisure time and social changes resulting in more informal eating habits have also contributed to the development of C-stores. TM Retail is capitalising on this trend by converting its CTN stores to convenience stores and thereby exploiting the existing locations and goodwill of its stores. C-stores differentiate themselves from the superstore chains by satisfying their customers’ requirements for impulse and “top-up” purchases (such as milk and bread) and by having extended opening hours.

 

The typical C-store is located close to its customer base (often within walking distance) and has longer opening hours than most CTNs and supermarkets. News, tobacco, confectionery, alcohol and groceries are among its core products, and it offers a broad range of other products and services which may include, for example, video rental, telephone cards, baked goods, fast food and photocopying facilities. However, the range of groceries stocked is smaller than that stocked by a superstore.

 

Typical C-store operators have grown by a combination of methods, including conversion of CTNs to C-stores, acquiring established stores from small independent operators and developing greenfield sites. Apart from typical C-store operators, the other major entrants into C-store retailing have been petrol (gasoline) retailers, who have expanded mainly through the conversion and extension of their existing petrol retail outlets and, more recently, the major supermarkets.

 

There are a number of retail sectors active in neighbourhood locations, including off-licences (stores which sell alcohol for consumption off the premises), grocers, chemists, garage forecourts, C-stores and CTNs.

 

According to “Verdict on Neighbourhood Retailing 2004”, published by Verdict Research Limited, considered to be the leading retail analysts and consultants in the United Kingdom and Europe, the Co-op Group is the largest neighbourhood retailer with a 5.7 per cent market share and TM Retail is the eighth largest with 1.9 per cent of the market, reflecting the high level of fragmentation. The rest of the market includes symbol grocers, multiple C-store operators, regional operators and independents. Between 1998 and 2003, the number of neighbourhood stores is estimated to have fallen by 10 per cent. The large regional chains of CTNs and C-stores have benefited from this trend as it has created a new opportunity to increase market share and store profitability.

 

C-store Conversion Programme

 

The Company believes that it has developed a strong position in the growing C-store market by converting its existing CTNs into C-stores, where appropriate. Management believes that conversion is significantly cheaper and lower-risk than acquiring or building new C-stores and allows it to benefit from the existing goodwill of its CTN stores. At the time a CTN is converted into a C-store, increased space is usually obtained by extending into the stockroom or office area, extending into adjacent premises, or relocating the existing business into larger, nearby premises, many by acquisition of a competitor business.

 

- 17 -


Table of Contents

Properties

 

The majority of TM Retail’s stores are away from the main shopping street (referred to in the United Kingdom as the “high street”) in the town or village in which they are located and a large proportion are in or near housing estates. Many of the Company’s customers live within walking distance of TM Retail stores. Approximately 87 per cent of TM Retail stores are located in residential areas or small towns. The type of location of TM Retail stores as at November 27, 2004 was as follows:

 

     CTNs

   C-stores

   V-stores

Type of Location


   No. of
Shops


  

% of

Total


   No. of
Shops


  

% of

Total


   No. of
Shops


  

% of

Total


Residential area

   528    59    149    49    11    9

Local shopping centre

   274    30    74    24    69    57

Large shopping centre

   54    6    17    6    27    22

Large town centre

   33    4    33    11    14    12

Other

   10    1    34    11    0    0
    
  
  
  
  
  

Total

   899    100    307    100    121    100
    
  
  
  
  
  

 

The breakdown of stores by retail space as of November 27, 2004 was as follows:

 

Retail Space (Sq. ft)


   CTNs

   C-stores

   V-stores

   Total
Stores


   Percentage
of total
Retail
Space


Less than 500

   221    21    0    242    18

500-999

   512    79    0    591    45

1,000-1,999

   157    160    53    370    28

Over 2,000

   9    47    68    124    9
    
  
  
  
  

Total

   899    307    121    1,327    100
    
  
  
  
  

 

TM Retail’s property portfolio and the nature of its ownership interests as at November 27, 2004 were as follows:

 

     Freehold(1)

   Long Leasehold(2)

   Short Leasehold(3)

   Total(4)

Shops

   70    23    1,409    1,502

Offices

   1    0    4    5

Accommodation(5)

   12    6    50    68

Other

   1    1    20    22
    
  
  
  
     84    30    1,483    1,597
    
  
  
  

(1) Owned by the Company.

 

(2) All long leases have a remaining period of more than 50 years (as of November 27, 2004).

 

(3) All short leases have a remaining period of less than 50 years (as of November 27, 2004).

 

(4) The number of shop property interests is greater than the number of total stores due to sublet properties, vacant properties, failed assignees and multiple lease interests per branch.

 

(5) Either vacant, sub-let or provided to store manager, typically over the shop.

 

- 18 -


Table of Contents

Major Distributors

 

The Company’s distributors or suppliers deliver directly to the individual TM Retail stores all of the products on offer. In July 1999, a long-term agreement was entered into with Palmer and Harvey McLane to outsource TM Retail’s distribution of tobacco, confectionery and snacks, canned and packet grocery and alcohol. Palmer and Harvey McLane were Forbuoys’ existing suppliers and subsequently acquired the central distribution operation formerly managed by Martin.

 

Perishable products, such as milk, bread and sandwiches, are supplied locally usually on a daily basis. There are three major distributors of newspapers in the United Kingdom: W H Smith, John Menzies and Surridge Dawson. Each is assigned a specific region by publishers, and TM Retail deals with the relevant distributor in its respective region.

 

Trademarks

 

The Company has registered its service marks of “Forbuoys” and “McColls”.

 

The Tobacco Market

 

The UK duty-paid cigarette market accounted for an estimated 56 billion cigarettes in 2000, which made it the fifth largest market in Western Europe. The UK Government estimates in addition that almost 1 in 3 cigarettes consumed are not UK duty-paid, bringing total estimated consumption to 82 billion cigarettes. The smoking population in the United Kingdom is estimated to have remained constant at around 23.7 per cent of the population in 2000. In 2000, the UK tobacco duty paid market had an estimated retail value, including excise duties and VAT, of over £11.6 billion, of which approximately £10.7 billion was cigarette sales. The volumes of UK duty-paid tobacco products sold in the United Kingdom have declined since the 1970s. Total UK duty-paid cigarette consumer sales volumes over the period 1997 to 2000 fell by an average of 10 per cent each year. See “Item 3. Key Information—Reduced Demand for Tobacco Products – Relaxation on Personal Imports”. This period has also seen increasing demand for cigarette brands with a lower tar content and greater competition between manufacturers based on pricing. There are over 300 brands of cigarette sold in the United Kingdom. However, the market is highly concentrated, with the eight leading brands accounting for more than half of all cigarette sales.

 

A significant factor affecting the Company’s operations is excise duties on tobacco products although the impact has diminished since the disposal of Mayfair Services. As at January 2004, approximately [80] per cent of the recommended retail price for premium brand cigarettes sold in the United Kingdom consists of excise duties and VAT. Rates of duty charged on tobacco products in the United Kingdom are typically higher than those charged in other western European countries. This encourages illegal cross-border trade from countries with lower levels of duty. In March 2001, the UK Government estimated that 33 per cent of all tobacco consumed in the United Kingdom was not UK duty-paid; including almost 1 in 3 cigarettes and 80 per cent of hand-rolled tobacco.

 

For several years, the UK Government increased duties on tobacco products by an average of at least five per cent per annum in excess of the rate of inflation. However, the last increase of this magnitude was in the March 2000 Budget and in the subsequent budgets, the increase was in line with inflation (which in the March 2005 Budget meant an increase of 2.6 per cent). These increases have represented an annual direct increase in costs for tobacco manufacturers, which, but for the offsetting effect of illegal cross-border trade, when passed on to customers, is believed to have the effect of reducing the consumption of tobacco products. The continuing impact of price increases in the UK cigarette market, principally due to substantial duty increases in recent years, has reduced annual UK duty- paid volumes, led to greater price competition and accelerated trading down by consumers to lower price cigarette brands. These changes have particularly affected the premium sector of the UK cigarette market.

 

An EC Council Directive (2002/10/EC) which came into force on July 1, 2002 amended Directive 92/79/EC and requires, subject to some derogations, that the minimum excise tax (excluding VAT) on the

 

- 19 -


Table of Contents

most popular price category of cigarette in each EU country must represent not less than 57 per cent of the recommended retail selling price (including VAT) and shall not be less than €60 per 1,000 cigarettes. As from July 1, 2006, this figure shall be increased to €64 per 1,000 cigarettes.

 

Regulation and Litigation

 

Tobacco Regulation in the United Kingdom

 

Advertising and Manufacturing Regulation

 

The advertising, sale and consumption of cigarettes and other tobacco products in the United Kingdom has traditionally been subject to pressure from the UK Government, health officials and anti-smoking groups. The current UK Government has emphasised its intention to ensure that the number of people smoking in the United Kingdom falls, and has been supported in this by pressure groups such as Action on Smoking and Health (ASH) and QUIT.

 

A number of substantial restrictions on the marketing, advertising, product design and consumption of cigarettes have been introduced by Government regulation (much of which implements EC legislation in this area). Recent examples include the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002 the Tobacco Products (Manufacture, Presentation and Sale) (Safety) Regulations 2002 and the Tobacco Products Regulations 2001. The legislative restrictions on advertising and promotion restrict the types of media and forms of advertising used and require the placement of a health warning on every advertisement and on the packaging of tobacco products.

 

In particular, the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002, which received Royal Assent on November 7, 2002, makes it an offence to: publish tobacco advertisements in the United Kingdom; print, devise or distribute a tobacco advertisement in the United Kingdom, (whether in electronic or other form); display tobacco products or their prices in a place or website where tobacco products are offered for sale if the display does not comply with such requirements as may be specified in regulations; distribute free to the public any product or coupon with the purpose of promoting a tobacco product; be a party to a sponsorship agreement if the purpose or effect of that agreement is to promote tobacco products in the United Kingdom. The Act also permits the Secretary of State to make ‘brand sharing’ regulations prohibiting or restricting the use of any name, emblem or other feature which is connected with a tobacco product, in connection with any other service or product. Such regulations were made in 2004 and are referred to below in more detail.

 

The Act supersedes voluntary agreements on advertising that had been in operation between the Government and the tobacco industry prior to it coming into force. Additionally, the ban on sponsorship under the Act now covers the promotion of tobacco products in the United Kingdom, which had previously been monitored by the Committee for Monetary Agreements on Tobacco Advertising and Sponsorship.

 

Under the Act, there are exemptions for certain advertisements in or outside the premises of “specialist tobacconists” (a shop selling tobacco products by retail more than half of whose sales derive from the sale of those tobacco products); to publications for which the UK is not the principle market (except in-flight magazines); and business or intra-trade related advertisements.

 

Pursuant to the first six commencement orders, the Act came into force in a staged timetable from February 14, 2003, except in the case of tobacco advertisements which are published, printed, devised or distributed solely for the purposes of a distribution that is restricted to those members of the public who before October 8, 1999 requested their inclusion in such distributions; or for the purposes of the promotion of a tobacco product in a place or on a website where tobacco products are offered for sale.

 

- 20 -


Table of Contents

The prohibition under the Act was extended on December 21, 2004 to include advertisements in places where tobacco product are offered for sale (Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002 (Commencement No 7) Order 2004 for England, Wales and Northern Ireland and Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002 (Commencement No 8) (Scotland) Order 2004 for Scotland). By virtue of this same order, it will be extended on July 31, 2005 to all advertisements, other than in the case of a tobacco advertisement which is published, devised or distributed solely for the purposes of the promotion of a tobacco product on a website where tobacco products are offered for sale.

 

The Act has given rise to the introduction of associated regulations aimed at targeting and clarifying certain specific areas of tobacco advertising. The Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Point of Sale) Regulations 2004 came into force on December 21, 2004 despite a claim for judicial review by the tobacco industry (R (on the application of British American Tobacco and others) v Secretary of State for Health [2004] EWHC 2493 (Admin)). These regulations clarified that no offence would be committed under the Act by the publication of an advertisement on a gantry or display unit at a point of sale for tobacco products, provided that the advertisement is restricted to the name, emblem and price of the tobacco product (and no other words or images), covers a maximum area of 210mm x 147.5mm. and contains a health warning occupying 30% of its size. No offence is also committed by the publication of an advertisement on a vending machine from which only tobacco products are sold, provided that the advertisement consists only of a picture of the packet of a tobacco product which is for sale from that vending machine, is no larger than the surface area of the largest face of the packet of the tobacco product depicted and includes an appropriate health warning.

 

The Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Specialist Tobacconists) Regulations 2004 also came into force on 21 December 2004, providing for stricter controls on the nature of any advertisements with regard to the exemption for specialist tobacconists.

 

In addition, the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Brandsharing) Regulations 2004 were passed on July 13, 2004, and are due to come into force on July 31, 2005. These regulations will prohibit the use by a person, in connection with any non-tobacco product, of any feature which is the same as, or is so similar as to be likely to be mistaken for, any feature which is connected with a tobacco product (or vice versa). They do not apply to point of sale brandsharing (subject to restrictions on size and warnings similar to those in the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Point of Sale) Regulations 2004).

 

All tobacco sponsorship (for example, in relation to Formula 1 and World Snooker) will end by July 31, 2005. The Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Sponsorship) Transitional Regulations 2003 transposed the EU Directive 2003/33/EC in this regard (see European Regulation section below).

 

Other Existing Regulation

 

The Children and Young Persons Act 1933 makes it illegal to sell cigarettes to anyone under sixteen and the Children and Young Persons (Protection from Tobacco) Act 1991 makes it an offence to sell unpackaged cigarettes or to fail to display warning statements that the sale of tobacco products to anyone under sixteen is illegal. It is the statutory duty of every local authority to consider taking enforcement action in relation to these Acts at least once a year. On September 13, 2000, the Protocol on Underage Sales was launched. There is to be an annual survey carried out of enforcement by local trading standards authorities to monitor enforcement of the law on underage tobacco sales.

 

Under the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 employers have to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the health, safety and welfare at work of all their employees. The Health and Safety Executive (“HSE”) currently recommends that all employers should have a specific policy on smoking in the workplace and that this should give priority to the needs of non-smokers who do not wish to breathe tobacco smoke. One of the key messages in relation to their stance on passive smoking was that non-smoking should be regarded as the norm in enclosed workplaces. Special provision should be made for smoking, rather than the reverse. The Health and Safety Commission (“HSC”) has published a Consultative Document which contains a draft Approved Code of Practice (“AcoP”) which is now being revised.

 

- 21 -


Table of Contents

The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999 require every employer to assess the risks to the health of his/her employer to which they are exposed whilst they are at work. The purpose of this assessment is to assist the employer in complying with the relevant statutory provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.

 

The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1992 contain provisions requiring employers to provide effective and suitable ventilation, and protection from discomfort caused by tobacco smoke.

 

In Scotland, (under the devolved powers) the Smoking, Health and Social Care Bill was introduced on 16 December 2004. The bill proposes to: ban smoking in enclosed public places; create an offence of permitting others to smoke in no-smoking areas; create an offence of smoking in no-smoking premises; create an offence of failing to display warning notices in no-smoking premises; and set out the powers of enforcement officers to enter no-smoking premises. The bill is due to come into force in the Spring of 2006. The bill is currently with the Health Committee and has passed the pre-legislative scrutiny stage. This followed a major consultation exercise on whether there should be further restrictions on smoking in public places. The consultation in Scotland prompted the UK Government to consider the possibility of a country-wide ban, embodied in the latest White Paper discussed below.

 

Review Committees, Charters and Reports

 

In recent years, there has been an increased amount of attention focused on environmental tobacco smoke or “passive smoking”. The Scientific Committee on Tobacco and Health was set up in 1994 to review evidence on tobacco and health, and to provide advice to the Chief Medical Officer and the UK Department of Health. In 1998, the Committee produced a report which focused particularly on the negative health effects of passive smoking. The report concluded that long-term exposure to environmental tobacco smoke caused lung cancer and posed a number of other health risks. On December 21, 1999, following an application by the Tobacco Manufacturers’ Association, the High Court ruled that the report was not susceptible to judicial review.

 

The Public Places Charter was published on September 14, 1999 and commits signatories to improving the facilities for customers who do not smoke in pubs, bars and restaurants. The Charter’s requirements include: a written policy on smoking; implementation through non-smoking areas, air cleaning and ventilation as appropriate; and communication to customers through external and internal signs. The Government is currently working with the hospitality industry to agree targets for an increase in smoke-free facilities and clean air.

 

HM Treasury commissioned the Wanless Report to consult on the long-term assessment of health policy, including questions for consideration on the negative impact of smoking. The Final Report was published in April 2002 and highlights investment in encouraging people to stop smoking as an effective way to improve the population’s health status and cut health spending in the longer term.

 

The Department of Health has also run a project entitled Tackling Tobacco in the Workplace, the aim of which is to encourage businesses to develop and implement tobacco policies to help smokers to give up and to lead to the creation of smoke-free work places.

 

White Papers and Bills (Proposed Legislation)

 

On December 10, 1998, the UK Government issued a White Paper (“Smoking Kills – A White Paper on Tobacco”) that set out a concerted programme of action, the aim of which was to reduce smoking in the United Kingdom. The White Paper announced that the Government was planning a £50 million publicity campaign to shift attitudes and change behaviour and would invest £60 million in a comprehensive National Health Service (the “NHS”) service to help smokers to quit, which would include specialist counselling and a limited supply of free nicotine replacement therapy. This has been put into practice, with a billboard campaign, television campaign and specialist NHS clinics for smokers. The paper also stated that it did not

 

- 22 -


Table of Contents

feel a universal ban on smoking in all public places was justified while it could make fast and substantial progress in partnership with industry.

 

The Tobacco (Public Places and Workplaces) Bill was proposed as a private members bill in the House of Lords on 10 March 2004. It had its second reading in the House of Lords on 23 April 2004. No date was scheduled for a review by a committee before the end of the parliamentary session. There was insufficient parliamentary time to complete the process of this bill and as such the bill fell away and would need to be reintroduced to continue.

 

At the beginning of March 2004, the UK Government began a new consultation process on improving public health, one of the central tenets of which was the reduction of levels of smoking. As a result of this, the UK Government published another White Paper on 16 November 2004. Although it does not propose an outright ban, the paper sets out a schedule for banning smoking in most public places and workplaces in order to protect the welfare of others. In addition, chapter 1, paragraph 23 states that: “While people want to make their own health decisions, they do expect the Government to help by creating the right environment. Therefore, supporting informed choice is the first principle on which this White Paper is built”.

 

The key provisions set out are as follows. Smoking is to be banned in most workplaces and places where food is served. Exemptions are proposed for pubs that do not serve food and private clubs. Smoking “in the bar area” will be prohibited everywhere. The UK Government estimates that 10%-30% of pubs fall into the category of not serving food. In terms of timetable, by the end of 2006, all government departments and NHS organisations will be smoke-free (supplemented by advice and support for those employees who want to stop smoking). By the end of 2007, all enclosed public places and workplaces, other than licensed premises (and those specifically exempted) will, subject to legislation, be smoke-free. By the end of 2008 arrangements for licensed premises will be in place.

 

The UK Government intends to use the intervening period to draw up the required legislation and consider the position relating to certain specific establishments where further issues need to be considered (for example, hospices, prisons). This will include consulting with schools and other institutions on how best to enforce the policy and what penalties will be appropriate. The Health Development Agency will shortly publish guidance for NHS organisations on the provision of smoke-free buildings.

 

Under the White Paper, the UK Government did not consider that there is a case for setting up a UK agency to regulate tobacco. They are, however, in discussion with the European Commission and working with partner agencies, including the Medicine and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency (who regulate medicinal nicotine products), the Health Protection Agency, scientific advisory committees and the National Institute for Clinical Excellence to develop a strategy to take this work forward. They anticipate that a report will be produced by the European Commission in 2005, which will give a view of the cross-Europe priorities for work in this area. A commitment to public health research is confirmed, as is a hard line on tobacco smuggling.

 

In addition, the UK Government will continue with its campaign to provide comprehensive information about health risks of smoking, reasons not to smoke and access to NHS support, including Stop Smoking Services and nicotine replacement therapy. Amendments are proposed that would create new powers to ban retailers from selling tobacco products if they repeatedly flout the law relating to the sale of such products to minors. Some consideration in the White Paper was given to the regulation of scenes of smoking in films and on television though no additional legislation was proposed. The UK Government believes that picture warnings on tobacco products could play a powerful role in any campaign to reduce the number of smokers.

 

As a response to the White Paper, and particularly in relation to the proposed smoking ban, some leading pub companies have abandoned the Public Places Charter initiative and promoted their own scheme in the hope of staving off legislation. The British Medical Association’s Tobacco Control Resource Centre has

 

- 23 -


Table of Contents

endorsed the White Paper, as have the Health Development Agency, although they have urged some scope for allowing smoking in mental health hospitals.

 

Smoking in pubs, restaurants and other enclosed work places was banned in the Republic of Ireland from March 29, 2004. Other foreign jurisdictions have also implemented their own bans.

 

Excise Duties

 

Excise duties represent a significant percentage of the retail price of tobacco products and have been steadily increased in the United Kingdom. As at January 2004, cigarette excise duties and VAT comprise approximately 80 per cent of the recommended retail price of a pack of premium brand cigarettes in the United Kingdom. In 1997 the UK Government stated its intention to increase excise duties on tobacco products by an average of at least 5 per cent a year in excess of the rate of inflation, and such increases were made in 1997, 1998, 1999 and 2000. In his Pre-Budget Report in November 2000, the Chancellor stated the UK Government’s belief that there is a strong case for a year on year real terms increase in the price of cigarettes. However, the last increase in excess of inflation was in the March 2000 Budget. In the March 2001, April 2002, April 2003, March 2004 and March 2005 Budgets, tobacco duty increase was in line with inflation (which in the March 2005 Budget meant an increase of 2.6 per cent).

 

Tobacco Regulation in Europe

 

There continues to be increasing regulation of tobacco products, excise tax, advertising and other tobacco-related areas at the EU level. In particular, in recent years, the Products Directive and Advertising Directive have been adopted. The application of this legislation has increased with the accession of ten new Member States to the EU in May 2004.

 

Directives

 

The European Parliament and the European Council adopted a directive on the manufacture, presentation and sale of tobacco products in June 2001 (2001/37/EC) (the “Products Directive”). The Products Directive combines existing legislation on tar content and labelling and reduces the current maximum tar yield per cigarette, introducing for the first time maximum yields for nicotine and carbon monoxide (which apply from January 1, 2004). It also introduces new, larger warnings, provisions for photographic health warnings, bans on misleading descriptors such as “low tar” and “light”, and requires manufacturers to give information on the contents of their products. Manufacturers and importers are required to submit a list of all ingredients used in the manufacture of tobacco products by brand name and type and give details of any toxicological data available to the manufacturer or importer. Member States of the EU are required to make this information public.

 

Directive 2003/33/EC of May 26, 2003 on the advertising and sponsorship of tobacco products (the “Advertising Directive”) seeks to harmonise the regulatory rules governing the advertising of tobacco products other than on television, e.g. in the press, other printed publications, and on the radio. In addition, it seeks to regulate tobacco company sponsorship of radio programmes and of certain events or activities involving, or taking place in, several member states. As the Directive requires Member States to place broad restrictions on such advertising or sponsorship, it is likely to have an impact on the efficacy of tobacco marketing.

 

The main aim of the Advertising Directive is to “ensure the free movement of the media concerned and of related services and to eliminate the obstacles to the operation of the Internal Market”. However, insofar as the Directive requires Member States to place broad restrictions on such advertising or sponsorship, it is likely to have an impact on the efficacy of tobacco marketing. The Directive replaces the similar Directive 98/43/EC, which was annulled by the European Court of Justice in October 2000 on the basis that the

 

- 24 -


Table of Contents

blanket ban on tobacco advertising that it sought to create was not necessary to remove distortions in the internal market, which was the basis relied on by the legislature in enacting the legislation.

 

The main provisions of the Advertising Directive are as follows. Advertising in the press and other printed publications is to be limited to publications intended exclusively for professionals in the tobacco trade and to publications which are printed and published in third countries, where those publications are not principally intended for the Community market. All forms of radio advertising for tobacco products is to be prohibited, whilst radio programmes shall not be sponsored by undertakings whose principal activity is the manufacture or sale of tobacco products. In addition, Sponsorship of events or activities involving or taking place in several Member States (e.g. Formula 1 motor racing) or otherwise having crossborder effects is to be prohibited.

 

Member states are required to implement the Advertising Directive by July 31, 2005. This is particularly significant with the UK in relation to Formula 1. Under section 20 of the Tobacco Advertising and Promotion Act 2002, provision had been made for regulations to be passed delaying the prohibition of tobacco sponsorship until (at the latest) 1 October 2006. The Advertising Directive seeks to bring forward the prohibition on sponsorship by more than a year. The Tobacco Advertising and Promotion (Sponsorship) Transitional Regulations 2003 have enacted this provision in UK legislation.

 

The European Commission had stated that before 2005 it will propose a new directive concerning a common list of ingredients authorised for tobacco products and will seek advice on whether any additives used may make the taste of tobacco more palatable to young people. As yet, this has not been proposed.

 

In addition, Directive 92/79/EC (as amended by Council Directive 2002/10/EC) requires, subject to some derogations, that the minimum excise tax (excluding VAT) on the most popular price category of cigarette in each EU country must represent not less than 57 per cent of the recommended retail selling price (including VAT) and shall not be less than €60 per 1,000 cigarettes. As from July 1, 2006, this figure shall increase to €64 per 1,000 cigarettes. The requirements under this Directive have been implemented in the United Kingdom and the table of excise duties payable on tobacco is revised on an annual basis.

 

Commission Decisions

 

Commission Decision of November 2001 makes reference to the intended phasing out of tobacco subsidies, whilst guaranteeing adequate replacement schemes for the tobacco farmers. On March 25, 2002, the Council of the EU adopted Regulation 546/2002 whereby in order to promote human health, tobacco farmers’ subsidies are to be reduced and, at the same time, steps are to be taken to develop new sources of income and economic activity for them.

 

Commission Decision of February 25, 2004 adopted a 2004 work plan for the implementation of the programme of Community action in the field of public health (2003 to 2008). Tackling tobacco addiction and smoking prevention and cessation are identified as priorities.

 

Council Recommendations

 

Council Recommendation of December 2, 2002 on the prevention of smoking and initiatives to improve tobacco control recommends that Member States adopt various measures, including requiring vendors to establish that purchasers have reached the legal age for purchase, removing tobacco products from self-service displays in retail outlets and restricting access to tobacco vending machines. It also requires Member States to implement legislation that provides protection from exposure to environmental tobacco smoke in indoor workplaces, enclosed public places and public transport and to implement appropriate price measures on tobacco products so as to discourage tobacco consumption. The Commission is to monitor and assess the developments and measures undertaken by Member States and report on the implementation of the

 

- 25 -


Table of Contents

proposed measures. This Council Recommendation includes certain issues arising from the World Health Organisation (the “WHO”) Framework Convention negotiations.

 

Cases

 

The European Court of Justice (“ECJ”) has given a ruling on the compatibility of the Products Directive with higher provisions of EC law (proportionality and non-discrimination). This featured in case C-434/02 (Arnold André GmbH & Co. KG v Landrat des Krieses Herford) in which the ECJ ruled that the Products Directive was compatible.

 

Global Regulation

 

On February 19, 2002, the European Report on Tobacco Control Policy was published and the Warsaw Declaration for a Tobacco-free Europe was adopted, both in conjunction with the WHO European Ministerial Conference for a Tobacco-free Europe. The Report reviewed the implementation of the Third Action Plan for a Tobacco-free Europe, while the Warsaw Declaration committed states participating in the conference (including the United Kingdom) to: developing and adopting the European Strategy for Tobacco Control (Fourth Action Plan for a Tobacco-free Europe); declaring their strong support for preparing a comprehensive WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control; and urging Member States and intergovernmental organisations to strengthen European partnership and solidarity in tobacco control.

 

On May 21, 2003, the 192 member states of the WHO adopted the world’s first public health treaty, the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control. The main provisions of the treaty include: an obligation on signatory states to adopt and implement large, clear, visible health warnings and messages on tobacco products and their outside packaging; an obligation on signatory states to promote effective measures for protection from exposure to tobacco smoke in indoor workplaces, public transport, indoor public places and, as appropriate, other public places; and an obligation on party states to undertake a comprehensive ban on tobacco advertising, promotion and sponsorship. The treaty text states that governments should “ …develop, implement, periodically update and review comprehensive multisectoral national tobacco control strategies, plans and programmes in accordance with this Convention and the protocols to which it is a Party.”

 

Council Decision of June 2, 2004 concerning the conclusion of the WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control approved the WHO framework on behalf of the EC.

 

For the treaty to come into force, it needed to be signed and ratified by 40 participating countries. It was ratified by the UK on December 16, 2004 following ratification by the requisite fortieth country (Peru) on December 1, 2004. This means that the treaty will now be binding, under international law, on all those who have ratified it. The Treaty is due to come into effect on 28 February 2005.

 

Tobacco Litigation

 

Tobacco manufacturers in the United Kingdom, including the Company’s suppliers, have been sued by parties seeking damages for illnesses claimed to have resulted from tobacco consumption. To the Company’s knowledge, no such action has been decided in favour of a claimant in the United Kingdom.

 

The first action brought against a tobacco manufacturer in the United Kingdom for alleged smoking-related health effects is believed to have been in 1988. In 1992, legal aid was granted to approximately 200 claimants in England to commence litigation against a number of tobacco manufacturers, including Gallaher and Imperial Tobacco, in respect of alleged injuries caused by smoking. Legal aid was withdrawn in July 1996. Subsequently, various writs were issued against the tobacco manufacturers by some 52 claimants, none of whom had legal aid.

 

- 26 -


Table of Contents

On February 9, 1999 the High Court ruled that the actions of 36 of the 52 claimants were time-barred. The judge stated that the claimants’ chances of establishing liability were “speculative” and that, even if primary liability were established, defences of consent or contributory negligence could reduce or eliminate any award of damages. In addition, none of the defendants had acted promptly or reasonably once they knew that the acts or omissions of the tobacco companies might be capable of giving rise to an action for damages.

 

There was no full hearing on the merits, as the claimants withdrew their claims following this decision. Imperial and Gallaher agreed not to pursue legal costs from the claimants who had withdrawn. In return, the claimants’ solicitors gave an undertaking not to take any further action against the tobacco industry for the next five years, or against Imperial and Gallaher specifically for the next ten.

 

On October 23, 2001 permission was granted by the Court of Session in Edinburgh for a widow to sue Imperial Tobacco for £500,000 in respect of her husband’s death from lung cancer. Although the hearing concluded on February 20, 2004, the judgment has not yet been delivered.

 

The Company is not a party to any smoking and related ill-health litigation in any jurisdiction. However, there can be no guarantee that such actions will not arise in the future. In addition, although the Company is currently only a retailer of tobacco products, previous sales of cigarettes sold under Forbuoys’ own brand name and, with the acquisition of Dillons Stores Limited in August 2004, current sales of cigarettes under own brand names, although manufactured by another company, as well as the Company’s activities as a tobacco retailer, could potentially subject the Company to future litigation.

 

Other Government Regulation

 

Various other aspects of the Company’s businesses are also subject to governmental regulation, including standards for storage, distribution, labelling and the sale of food products, the requirement of a license for any shop selling alcohol or fireworks, standards for post office branches and general health and safety standards. Although the Company believes it is operating in substantial compliance with these laws and regulations, such laws and regulations are subject to change.

 

There can be no assurance that additional or more stringent requirements will not be imposed on the Company’s operations in the future. Failure to comply with such current or future laws and regulations could result in fines against the Company, a temporary shutdown of the Company’s operations or the loss of certification or rights to sell its products. Even in the absence of governmental action, a reduction in the Company’s profit margins based on increases in licensing or inspection fees or other duties payable by the Company or other additional compliance costs could result from Government regulations.

 

The Company has received a notice from the Office of Fair Trading (“OFT”) stating that the OFT has reasonable grounds to suspect vertical price fixing among manufacturers and retailers of tobacco-related products in contravention of Section 2 of the Competition Act 1998 and has requested the Company to provide specific documentation and information. The Company intends to co-operate with the OFT with respect to its request. The Company is not thought to be the main target of this enquiry. Because the Company has no knowledge of the detailed nature of this enquiry, no assurance can be given that this will not have adverse consequences for the Company.

 

- 27 -


Table of Contents

Organisational Structure

 

The Company is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Thistledove Limited. The following information relates to those subsidiary undertakings, or former subsidiary undertakings, whose results or financial position principally affected the Company during Fiscal 2004:

 

Name of company


  

Country of

registration (or

incorporation)

and operation


  

Holding


  

Proportion

of voting

rights and

shares held


  

Nature of

business


Bracklands Ltd*    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%    Property Co
Clark Retail Ltd*    Scotland    Ordinary shares    100%    Retailing
Dillons Stores Ltd*    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%    Retailing
Forbuoys Ltd    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%    Retailing
Martin Retail Group Ltd*    Scotland    Ordinary shares    100%    Retailing
TM Vending Ltd    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%    Corporate Activities
Tog Ltd*    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%    Intermediate Holding Co

 

* 100% held by a subsidiary undertaking

 

Property, Plants and Equipment

 

The Company had 1,603 property interests at November 27, 2004, all of which were held in the United Kingdom, and comprised the 1,597 properties managed by TM Retail (see table on page 18), plus 6 centrally managed properties which are no longer used by the Company. Of the Company’s property interests, 1,519 were leaseholds. The remaining properties were owned. The centrally managed properties were properties that remained after various businesses disposals, five of which were sub-let.

 

Of the property interests, 1,502 represent trading, sub-let or vacant shops.

 

The principal administrative offices of the Company and the main operation facilities for TM Retail are located in Brentwood, England and are owned by the Company.

 

The leased properties have a book value of £9.0 million on the Company’s balance sheet, of which £7.8 million is classified as ‘short’ leases, which are leases with a remaining life of less than 50 years. The Company’s total rent expense for Fiscal 2004 was £27.7 million.

 

The maintenance and upkeep of the property portfolio is the joint responsibility of the Company’s property and facilities departments together with the operational area management. Maintenance includes ensuring adherence to all current UK health and safety regulation, safety procedures and accident reporting procedures. Recent changes to the control of Asbestos at Work Act 2002, which came into force in 2004, require companies to identify the risks posed by asbestos to their employees and to put in place procedures to manage the risk. The Company has substantially completed a risk-assessment survey of all its premises, and undertaken remedial work where necessary. Plant and equipment at November 27, 2004 mainly comprised fittings and equipment in the shops and offices, with a book value of £31.2 million.

 

- 28 -


Table of Contents
Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects

 

The following should be read together with “Item 3. Key Information”, and with the Company’s Financial Statements and the Notes thereto included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

Overview

 

The Company was formed in 1995 upon the MBO of the principal retailing and vending businesses of Gallaher. Following the MBO, the Company streamlined its operations and focused on increasing profitability in its three core businesses, which comprised a leading nation-wide chain of newsagents and convenience stores under the name of TM Retail, a cigarette vending business, Mayfair Services, and a beverage and snack vending business, Vendepac.

 

The Company made key acquisitions for each of its core businesses. On November 28, 1998, it acquired the shares of Tog Limited, the parent company of the Martin Retail Group, for a total cash payment (including repayment of debt) of £75 million. Martin operated 781 retail outlets throughout the United Kingdom, comprising 731 traditional CTNs and 50 convenience stores.

 

Of the vending acquisitions since the MBO, those of the cigarette vending business of Stretton by Mayfair in December 1996 and the beverage and snack vending business of Vendcare in 1998 were significant in terms of increasing size.

 

Following strategic reviews, Mayfair Services was sold on December 8, 2000 to Sinclair Collis Limited, a subsidiary of Imperial Tobacco Group Plc, for a total consideration of £39.6 million and Vendepac was sold on July 20, 2001 to Compass Group, UK and Ireland Limited for a total consideration of £85.0 million.

 

On August 21, 2004, a subsidiary of the Company purchased from a subsidiary of Tesco plc, the entire share capital of Dillons Stores Limited (Dillons) for a consideration of £8.3 million, excluding stock and on a debt and cash-free basis. Trade creditors were not assumed. Dillons comprised 181 newsagent locations similar in operation to those within the existing TM Retail estate.

 

Revenues are generated primarily in cash. Sales represent the amounts receivable for goods and services sold in the relevant period, stated net of value added tax, and include commissions from the sale of the National Lottery’s on-line game and the sale of electronic mobile phone top-ups, and the gross sales of the National Lottery’s “Instants” scratch card tickets and from mobile phone vouchers.

 

Some goods (e.g. newspapers and magazines) have the selling price printed on the copy by the publisher. C-stores tend to have higher selling prices on many more items than CTNs, reflecting higher labour costs, longer opening hours and a better shopping environment. Changes in prices by product represent changes in purchase price of the product, or reflect prevailing trading conditions.

 

Critical Accounting Policies

 

The Company’s consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP. The preparation of financial statements requires the use of estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenditure of the period.

 

The Company believes the following critical accounting policies require significant judgement and/or the greatest use of estimates.

 

- 29 -


Table of Contents

Goodwill

 

Goodwill arising on acquisitions prior to November 28, 1998 was set off directly against reserves. Goodwill previously eliminated against reserves has not been reinstated on implementation of Financial Reporting Standard 10 “Goodwill and Intangible Assets” (“FRS10”). Positive goodwill arising on acquisitions since November 28, 1998 is capitalised, classified as an asset on the balance sheet and amortised on a straight-line basis over its useful economic life up to a presumed maximum of 20 years. It is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full financial year following the acquisition and in other periods if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. If a subsidiary or business is subsequently sold or closed, any goodwill arising on acquisition that was written off directly to reserves or that has not been amortised through the profit and loss account is reviewed for impairment and if such goodwill is not considered to be attached to the continuing business it is taken into account in determining the profit or loss on sale or closure.

 

In accordance with SFAS No.142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, the Company performs an annual impairment test of goodwill and non-amortisable intangible assets with indefinite useful lives. This test is performed once a year, or if events occur or circumstances change that would indicate the carrying value might be impaired. The net assets of the Company calculated for US GAAP are allocated or apportioned to the three reporting units (convenience stores, variety stores, newsagents) to give a carrying value for each, which is compared against a valuation of each reporting unit. Each valuation is calculated using standard techniques and assessed against other valuation criteria, such as acquisition data of similar businesses.

 

The use of different estimates, assumptions and judgements, in particular those involved in determining a value based on managements current expectations of future market conditions and operations, could result in materially different carrying values of assets and assessments of impairment.

 

Pensions

 

The determination of the Company’s obligations and expense for pension costs is dependent upon the selection of certain assumptions used by actuaries in calculating such amounts. These assumptions are set out in Note 24 of Notes to the Financial Statements and include the discount rates, the expected long-term rates of return on plan assets and rates of increase in salaries. Whilst management believes that the actuarial assumptions are appropriate, any significant changes to those used could materially affect both the Company’s pension obligations and future expense.

 

Tobacco Pre-purchases

 

The imposition of duty increases in the UK Government’s Budget statement and of manufacturer price increase has affected the annual pattern of the Company’s tobacco purchases and stock values. Most UK cigarette retailers, including the Company, seek to take advantage of these price rise opportunities and pre-purchase stock immediately ahead of announced or expected duty or manufacturer price increases. This is known as ‘tobacco pre-purchasing’. Prior to each tobacco pre-purchase, the level of any announced or anticipated duty or price rise and the benefits of acquiring additional stock are carefully assessed against the interest cost of funding additional stock levels.

 

In its Budget announcement of March 22, 2000, the Government announced its intention to limit pre-purchasing activity by restricting the volume of removal of cigarettes from all duty-suspended storage in the run up to each future Budget. In the past manufacturers typically made available between two and three months’ supply, but since 2001, supply has been restricted to several weeks only.

 

Manufacturers’ price increases in the UK have tended to occur at least once a year and are announced a few weeks in advance of implementation. With price rises typically lower than the duty increases, pre-purchases prior to a manufacturers’ price increase are normally economic at no more than several weeks’ purchase.

 

- 30 -


Table of Contents

Tobacco pre-purchases have resulted in large variations in working capital and periodic increases in short-term borrowings. The Company has in the past financed the pre-purchase through borrowings under uncommitted Stocking Facilities and committed Working Capital Facilities. The increased drawings on the Stocking Facility due to the pre-payment are typically paid down over the following months, matching the period over which the pre-purchase is sold by the Company.

 

Tobacco pre-purchases for the last three years including Fiscal 2004 have not been economic at more than several weeks’ purchase and as such have not been material to the Company’s operating performance over this period. Tobacco pre-purchases continue to have a short term impact on working capital levels but since the disposal in 2000 of the Company’s cigarette vending business, Mayfair Services, this impact has been much reduced, and absorbed within its committed Working Capital Facilities without recourse to special Stocking Facilities.

 

- 31 -


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

 

The following table sets out a summary of the Company’s results by business sector:

 

     Fiscal
2002


    Fiscal
2003


   

Fiscal

2004


 
     (£ millions)  

Sales:

                  

Continuing operations

                  

Ongoing retailing

   664.5     635.5     619.8  

Acquired retailing

   —       —       21.7  
    

 

 

     664.5     635.5     641.5  
    

 

 

Cost of sales:

                  

Continuing operations

                  

Ongoing retailing

   (503.0 )   (473.0 )   (459.6 )

Acquired retailing

   —       —       (16.6 )
    

 

 

     (503.0 )   (473.0 )   (476.2 )
    

 

 

Selling, distribution and administrative costs:

                  

Continuing operations

                  

Ongoing retailing

   (139.9 )   (140.5 )   (140.9 )

Acquired retailing

   —       —       (4.8 )
    

 

 

     (139.9 )   (140.5 )   (145.7 )

Central(1)

   (3.3 )   (3.4 )   (2.7 )
    

 

 

     (143.2 )   (143.9 )   (148.4 )

Exceptional costs

   (0.8 )   —       (1.2 )
    

 

 

Total selling, distribution and administrative costs

   (144.0 )   (143.9 )   (149.6 )
    

 

 

Non-operating items:

                  

Profit on fixed asset disposals - ongoing

   3.9     3.9     4.1  

Profit from discontinued operations

   —       —       1.6  
    

 

 

Total non-operating items

   3.9     3.9     5.7  
    

 

 

Profit/(loss) before interest, taxation and sale of businesses:

                  

Continuing operations

                  

Ongoing retailing

   25.5     25.9     23.4  

Acquired retailing

   —       —       0.3  
    

 

 

     25.5     25.9     23.7  

Central(1)

   (3.3 )   (3.4 )   (2.7 )
    

 

 

     22.2     22.5     21.0  

Discontinued operations

   —       —       1.6  

Restructuring costs

   (0.8 )   —       (1.2 )
    

 

 

Total profit before interest, taxation

and sale of businesses

   21.4     22.5     21.4  

Net interest expense

   (20.5 )   (12.1 )   (8.4 )

Taxation

   (0.2 )   (2.0 )   (4.8 )
    

 

 

Profit for the period

   0.7     8.4     8.2  
    

 

 


(1) “Central” includes central management costs, finance functions and administration.

 

- 32 -


Table of Contents

Fiscal 2003 compared to Fiscal 2004

 

Sales

 

The Company’s total sales increased 1.0 per cent to £641.5 million for Fiscal 2004 from £635.5 million in Fiscal 2003, principally due to the increase in store numbers.

 

Principally as a result of the Dillons acquisition, the total number of stores increased by 131 to 1,327 at the end of the financial period and the weighted average number of stores increased by 1.5 per cent during the year. “Same store” revenues excluding lottery revenues were approximately 0.5 per cent lower for the year as a whole with declines in “same store” tobacco, phone top-up and minerals/ice cream partly offset by improvements in grocery and news.

 

Cost of Sales

 

The Company’s total cost of sales increased 0.7 per cent to £476.2 million for Fiscal 2004 from £473.0 million in Fiscal 2003, primarily due to the increase in sales.

 

Selling, Distribution and Administration Costs

 

The Company’s total selling, distribution and administration costs increased 3.2 per cent to £148.4 million for Fiscal 2004 from £144.0 million in Fiscal 2003, principally due to the increases in TM Retail.

 

TM Retail’s selling, distribution and administration costs increased 3.7 per cent to £145.7 million for Fiscal 2004 from £140.5 million in Fiscal 2003, principally due to store operating costs which increased as a result of the increase in store numbers and wage rates. Wage rates increased principally as a result of the October 2003 National Minimum Wage increase and associated effects.

 

Central administration costs decreased by £0.7 million in Fiscal 2004 to £2.7 million.

 

Operating exceptional costs relate to redundancies that took place in both the retailing and central administration functions and the integration costs associated with the acquisition of Dillons Stores Limited, but are shown separately to aid year on year comparisons.

 

Profit before Interest, Taxation and Sale of Businesses

 

The Company’s total profit before interest, taxation and sale of businesses decreased 5.0 per cent to £21.4 million for Fiscal 2004 from £22.5 million in Fiscal 2003.

 

TM Retail’s profit before interest, taxation and restructuring costs decreased 8.5 per cent to £23.7 million for Fiscal 2004 from £25.9 million in Fiscal 2003 due to the increase in store operating costs partially offset by the increase in sales in excess of the increase in cost of sales.

 

Net Interest Expense

 

Net interest expense decreased 30.3 per cent to £8.4 million for Fiscal 2004 from £12.1 million in Fiscal 2003. This was due to exchange rate gains on both actual interest payments and the retranslation of the Senior Notes.

 

- 33 -


Table of Contents

Taxation

 

The taxation charge in Fiscal 2004 comprised UK current and deferred income taxes and included certain adjustments in respect of prior years. A reconciliation of the standard UK tax charge of 30 per cent to the actual tax is set out in Note 10 of Notes to the Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

Profit for the Period

 

The total profit for the period for the Company decreased to £8.2 million for Fiscal 2004 from £8.4 million in Fiscal 2003, the principal factor being the reduced retail performance and increased taxation charges, offset by the reduced interest expense.

 

Fiscal 2003 compared to Fiscal 2002

 

Sales

 

The Company’s and TM Retail’s sales decreased 4.4 per cent to £635.5 million for Fiscal 2003 from £664.5 million in Fiscal 2002, principally due to the impact of the 53rd week in Fiscal 2002 and the reduction of sales arising from the migration from vouchers to electronic phone top-up transactions, offset by improved same store revenues.

 

The total number of stores decreased by 17 to 1,196 at the end of the financial period. The weighted average number of stores decreased by 1.6 per cent during the year. “Same store” revenues excluding lottery revenues were approximately 1.7 per cent higher for the year as a whole with declines in “same store” tobacco, confectionery and greetings cards product revenues offset by improvements in news, convenience and other products. “Same store” revenues improved in the second half.

 

Cost of Sales

 

The Company’s and TM Retail’s cost of sales decreased 6.0 per cent to £473.0 million for Fiscal 2003 from £503.0 million in Fiscal 2002, primarily due to the reduction in sales.

 

Selling, Distribution and Administration Costs

 

The Company’s total selling, distribution and administration costs decreased to £143.9 million for Fiscal 2003 from £144.0 million in Fiscal 2002, principally due to restructuring costs incurred in Fiscal 2002 offset by increases in TM Retail.

 

TM Retail’s selling, distribution and administration costs increased 0.4 per cent to £140.5 million for Fiscal 2003 from £139.9 million in Fiscal 2002, principally due to increases in store operating costs in excess of decreases due to the extra week in Fiscal 2002.

 

Central administration costs increased by 2.1 per cent in Fiscal 2003 to £3.4 million from £3.3 million in Fiscal 2002.

 

Profit before Interest, Taxation and Sale of Businesses

 

The Company’s total profit before interest and taxation increased 5.3 per cent to £22.5 million in Fiscal 2003 from £21.4 million in Fiscal 2002.

 

TM Retail’s profit before interest and taxation increased 1.7 per cent to £25.9 million for Fiscal 2003 from £25.5 million in Fiscal 2002 due to the reduction in cost of sales in excess of the reduction in sales, partially offset by increased store operating costs.

 

- 34 -


Table of Contents

Net Interest Expense

 

Net interest expense decreased 41.1 per cent to £12.1 million for Fiscal 2003 from £20.5 million in Fiscal 2002. This was due to a combination of lower interest payable on a lower level of debt and a favourable movement on exchange rates, which gave rise to an exchange gain of £4.6 million, net of losses on currency hedges.

 

Taxation

 

The taxation charge of £2.0 million in Fiscal 2003 comprises UK current and deferred income taxes, including certain adjustments in respect of prior years. A reconciliation of the standard UK tax charge of 30 per cent to the actual tax is set out in Note 10 of Notes to the Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

Profit for the period

 

The Company’s total profit for the period increased to £8.4 million for Fiscal 2003 from £0.7 million in Fiscal 2002, the principal factor being the reduced net interest expense.

 

- 35 -


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

Cash Flows

 

Cash flow from operating activities fell from £25.0 million in Fiscal 2003 to £17.0 million in Fiscal 2004. This reflected the decision not to participate in certain supplier extended payment arrangements at the year end, as had been the practice in previous years.

 

A total of £1.0 million was expended during the year on replacing currency hedges.

 

A summary of the Company’s cash flow is as follows:

 

     (£ millions)

 
     Fiscal
2002


   

Fiscal

2003


    Fiscal
2004


 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   19.6     25.0     17.0  

Returns on investments and servicing of finance

   (22.8 )   (16.2 )   (14.7 )

Taxation (paid)/refunded

   (1.7 )   0.3     (2.5 )

Net capital expenditure and financial investment

   (3.0 )   (1.9 )   (1.8 )

Acquisitions and disposals

   (0.1 )   (1.4 )   (7.4 )

Decrease/(increase) in short-term deposits

   83.4     (1.3 )   8.0  

Financing including equity dividends paid

   (74.2 )   (1.5 )   (1.0 )

Increase/(decrease) in cash

   1.2     3.0     (2.4 )

 

Capital Expenditures

 

Routine capital expenditure is funded through the Company’s operating cash flow. See also “Item 4. Information on the Company—Capital Expenditure”.

 

Liquidity

 

The principal sources of funds for the Company in the future are anticipated to be cash flows from operating activities and any borrowings under future working capital facilities. The Company believes that these funds will provide the Company with sufficient liquidity and capital resources for the Company to meet its current and future financial obligations, including the payment of interest on the Notes and payment obligations arising under the Company’s other indebtedness, as well as to provide funds for the Company’s working capital, capital expenditure and other needs. However, no assurance can be given that this will be the case. The Company’s future operating performance and its ability to secure new facilities, or service or refinance the Notes and to repay, extend or refinance the bank facilities or continue to secure adequate levels of trade credit from suppliers or distributors will be subject to future economic conditions, financial, business and other factors, many of which are beyond the Company’s control.

 

The Company continues to review its exposure to currency translation fluctuations. During Fiscal 2004, the Company spent £1.0 million on further options. As of November 27, 2004, the Company had an option to purchase $145 million (and sell pounds sterling) at $1.6930 = £1.00. A further option on $145 million was purchased during January 2005 at $1.7380 = £1.00, which is exercisable on July 4, 2005.

 

Although the Company may seek to enter into a further set of hedging arrangements, there can be no assurance that it will be able to do so on commercially attractive terms. There are currently no hedging arrangements in place in respect of future interest payments.

 

As of November 27, 2004, the outstanding aggregate principal amount of the Senior Notes and Senior Subordinated Notes was $145.3 million and £53.3 million respectively.

 

Borrowings

 

Refer to Note 19 of Notes to the Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

- 36 -


Table of Contents

Seasonality

 

The Company’s business exhibits seasonality in the results of its operations. In general, sales volumes increase significantly in the Christmas and Easter holiday seasons, primarily in confectionery and stationery products. The summer season is an important trading period for TM Retail and can be significantly influenced by the weather. Working capital requirements fluctuate significantly during the year and generally reach their highest levels as a result of these seasons and periodic tobacco pre-purchases. The Company’s quarterly results of operations have fluctuated depending on the timing and amount of tobacco pre-purchases and profits, although this effect is likely to be less marked in the future.

 

Outlook

 

The Company is aware of no recent trends, either in selling prices or the cost of goods sold, which are likely to have a material effect on the Company’s profitability and/or liquidity.

 

The UK Government has recently announced an increase in the national minimum wage for adults from £4.85 per hour to £5.05 per hour effective from October 1, 2005. A further increase will take place on October 1, 2006 to an anticipated £5.35 per hour. The young workers rate will increase from £4.10 per hour to £4.25 per hour from October 1, 2005, with a further anticipated increase at October 1, 2006 to £4.45. The new rate of £3.00 per hour for 16 and 17 year olds introduced on October 1, 2004, is not expected to increase in 2005, but will be subject to inflationary increases in subsequent years. The Company expects that labour costs will rise significantly as a direct result of these increases, and also as other wage costs rise to maintain differentials. There can be no assurances that these cost increases will be able to be offset by improvements in trading generally or by specific cost savings. The result may thus have a material impact on the earnings of the Company.

 

Changes being implemented by the Post Office to the manner in which it dispenses pensions and benefits could lead to reduced customer levels in the Company’s stores where Post Offices are located. Further, the Company expects that remuneration based on transaction levels paid to the Company by the Post Office may fall as a result of fewer transactions being processed in these Post Offices. Both of these may have a material impact on the earnings of the Company.

 

Contractual Obligations

 

Contractual cash obligations, excluding trade and other creditors, are as follows:

 

     Payments due by period (£ millions)

Contractual Obligations    Total

   Less than
1 year


   1 – 3
years


   4 – 5
years


   After 5
years


Total debt

   130.5    —      —      130.5    —  

Operating leases

   191.8    25.0    43.5    34.9    88.4

Capital commitments

   0.2    0.2    —      —      —  
    
  
  
  
  

Total contractual cash obligations

   322.5    25.2    43.5    165.4    88.4
    
  
  
  
  

 

The operating lease liabilities are not shown on the Company’s balance sheet, the relevant annual payments being expensed in the Company’s profit and loss account. No allowance has been made for rents receivable on sub-let properties, so the amounts shown represent the full liability as at the end of Fiscal 2004. The Company has no other material contingent liabilities.

 

The Company’s financial liabilities are shown in more detail in Notes 18 to 22 of Notes to the Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 20-F.

 

- 37 -


Table of Contents

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

 

The Company does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements as defined by the SEC in Item 5E of Form 20-F that have, or are reasonably likely to have, a current or future effect on the Company’s financial condition, change in financial condition, revenues or expenses, results of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources that is material to investors.

 

- 38 -


Table of Contents
Item 6. Directors, Senior Management and Employees

 

The following table shows information regarding the Directors and Senior Executive Officers of the Company:

 

Name


   Age

  

Title


James Lancaster

   57   

Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and Director

Jonathan Miller

   41   

Chief Financial Officer

David Symondson

   49   

Director (Non-executive)

Mark Dunfoy

   39   

Director (Non-executive)

Stephen Wilkinson

   49   

Managing Director

Steve Davies

   51   

Human Resources Director

 

Russell Cox (resigned October 15, 2004) and David Saunders (resigned December 31, 2004) also served as directors during Fiscal 2004.

 

Kevin Hart, Paul Baxter and Nigel Waters left the company during Fiscal 2004, having served as Senior Executive Officers.

 

Directors

 

James Lancaster FCA is Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Company. Mr Lancaster established Mayfair in 1973 as a division of Gallaher. In 1984 he was appointed Chief Executive of TM Group Limited. At this time Gallaher combined cigarette and drinks vending with the acquisition by Gallaher of Vendepac. He was appointed Chairman and Chief Executive of the Gallaher Retail Division in 1993 and Chief Executive of TM Group Limited upon completion of the MBO in 1995. He is a director of the following non-group companies – Accantia Limited, Auto-Sleepers Limited and Upper Childown Limited.

 

Jonathan Miller ACA is Chief Financial Officer of the Company and was appointed to this position in November 2004. He had previously served as finance director of TM Retail (since 1999), finance director of Mayfair, which he joined in 1991, and as financial controller of the Company.

 

David Symondson has been a non-executive Director of the Company since 1995 and is a nominee of one of the principal shareholders. He is a director of Electra Administration Limited, Electra Partners Europe Limited, Printcrew Limited and Venetia Limited and is a non-executive director of Quantil Farms Limited, Quantil Limited, Capital Safety Group Limited and Allflex Holdings Inc.

 

Mark Dunfoy has been a non-executive Director of the Company since 2000 and is a nominee of one of the principal shareholders. He is a director of Montagu Private Equity Limited, a non-executive director of Clinphone Group Limited and Xtrac Transmissions Limited and a member of the advisory board of TMD Friction Holding GmbH.

 

Stephen Wilkinson is managing director of the Company and was appointed to this position in November 2004. He was previously appointed managing director (news and variety) of TM Retail in 2002, prior to which he was retail director of TM Retail and until 1997, operations director of Mayfair, where he had worked for nine years.

 

Senior Executive Officers

 

Steve Davies is director of human resources and joined the Company in 1990.

 

- 39-


Table of Contents

Compensation

 

The aggregate compensation paid to the above Directors and Senior Executive Officers of the Company, including pension amounts set aside by the Company of £215,000 was £1,403,000 for the year ended November 27, 2004. Profit related bonuses are payable only on the achievement of pre-determined Company performance targets. There is no entitlement to deferred or contingent compensation, or to share options.

 

Board Practices

 

The Executive Directors of the Company have entered into service agreements or employment contracts, whereby the employment of the relevant Executive Directors is terminable by the Company after the giving of twelve months’ notice. Mr Lancaster is required to give twelve months’ notice to terminate his service agreement and Messrs Miller and Wilkinson are required to give six months’ notice to terminate their employment contracts. There is otherwise no automatic expiration of term of office nor are there any special contracted benefits upon termination of employment. In addition, the Company maintains a “Key Man” life insurance policy in the amount of £500,000 for Mr Lancaster.

 

Remuneration Committee

 

The remuneration committee is a function of Thistledove Limited and comprises James Lancaster and the non-executive directors. It is responsible for making recommendations to the board on the Company’s framework of executive remuneration and its cost. The committee determines the contract terms, remuneration and other benefits for each of the Executive Directors, including performance related bonus schemes, pension rights and compensation payments. As nominees of principal shareholders, the non-executive directors receive no compensation directly from the Company. The board itself determines the remuneration of the senior executive officers.

 

Audit Committee

 

The audit committee is also a function of Thistledove Limited. It comprises the non-executive directors of the Company’s parent and meets not less than once annually. The committee provides a forum for reporting by the Company’s external auditors. Meetings are also attended, by invitation, by the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer.

 

The audit committee is responsible for considering a wide range of matters and monitoring the controls which are in force to ensure the integrity of the information published. The audit committee advises the board on the appointment of external auditors and on their remuneration both for audit and non-audit work, and discusses the nature, scope and results of the audit with external auditors. The audit committee keeps under review the cost effectiveness and the independence and objectivity of the external auditors.

 

Employees

 

The average numbers of company employees excluding executive directors of the Company during each of the last three years were as follows:

 

     Fiscal 2002

   Fiscal 2003

   Fiscal 2004

     (number)

Continuing operations

              

Retailing

   10,530    10,395    10,562

Central

   6    6    6
    
  
  
     10,536    10,401    10,568
    
  
  

 

The Company does not employ a significant number of temporary employees.

 

- 40 -


Table of Contents

There is no recognised trade union representation. However, information on matters of concern to employees is given through information bulletins, meetings and reports. The same information, reinforced by profit sharing and bonus schemes, is used to help employees achieve a common awareness of the financial and economic factors affecting the performance of the Company.

 

Share Ownership of Directors and Senior Executive Officers

 

Ownership of the parent company’s ‘A’ ordinary shares by the Directors and Senior Executive Officers is as follows (see also Item 7 “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”):

 

Name   

No of

“A” Shares

  

Percentage of

“A” Shares

James Lancaster

   47,526    26.6

Jonathan Miller

   2,780    1.6

Stephen Wilkinson

   2,780    1.6

Steve Davies

   *    *

* Denotes shareholding of less than 1 per cent.

 

In addition James Lancaster owns 1,104 ‘C’ ordinary shares, which represent less than 1% of the total ‘C’ ordinary shares.

 

- 41 -


Table of Contents
Item 7. Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions

 

Major Shareholders

 

TM Group Holdings PLC is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Thistledove Limited (“Thistledove”). The principal shareholders of the ordinary share capital of Thistledove Limited are as follows:

 

Name


  

Number of “A”

Ordinary
Shares


   Number of “B”
Ordinary
Shares


  

Number of “C”

Ordinary
Shares


   % of
Total


Montagu Private Equity Limited and Discretionary clients of HSBC Private Equity Europe Limited(1)

   —      145,914    71,793    32.9

Electra Fleming Limited and funds under its management(2)

   —      145,914    71,793    32.9

Funds managed by Legal & General Ventures Limited

   —      29,475    14,502    6.6

James Lancaster

   47,526    —      1,104    7.3

Russell Cox

   23,826    —      551    3.7

Philip Mitchell

   23,826    —      551    3.7

David Keen

   23,826    —      551    3.7

David Curzon

   9,927    —      368    1.6

Nigel Waters

   9,927    —      —      1.5

Employee Benefit Trust

   19,656    —      552    3.1

Others

   20,183    —      —      3.0
                   
                    100.0
                   

 

(1) Montagu Private Equity Limited (formerly HSBC Private Equity Limited) owns approximately 13.01 per cent of the ordinary share capital of Thistledove Limited. No discretionary client of HSBC Private Equity Europe Limited holds more than 9.0 per cent of Thistledove Limited’s ordinary share capital.

 

(2) Kingsway Nominees Ltd., Account DESEFPEP own approximately 24.81 per cent of the ordinary share capital of Thistledove Limited. No fund managed by Electra Fleming Limited holds more than 6.0 per cent of Thistledove Limited’s share capital.

 

Management and employees hold “A” and “C” ordinary shares. Certain institutional investors (the “Institutional Investors”) hold “B” and “C” ordinary shares. The “A”, “B” and “C” ordinary shares rank pari passu in all respects except that the “C” ordinary shares have the additional right to a fixed cumulative preferential dividend at the annual rate of 7 per cent of the nominal amount of and any premium paid on each “C” ordinary share. The articles of association of Thistledove contain restrictions on the transfer of ordinary shares. As long as Electra Fleming Limited manages funds holding 10 per cent or more of the “B” ordinary shares, it shall be entitled to appoint a director of Thistledove (“a “B” Director”). As long as Montagu Private Equity Limited and its discretionary clients hold 10 per cent or more of the “B” ordinary shares, it shall also be entitled to appoint a “B” Director. If either of such shareholdings is not held, the relevant appointment right vests in the holders of 75 per cent or more of the “B” and “C” ordinary shares, provided that the “B” and “C” ordinary shares represent at the time at least 10 per cent of the total issued share capital of Thistledove. The Electra Fleming funds and one of Montagu Private Equity Limited’s discretionary clients may each appoint an additional director in certain circumstances.

 

A shareholder’s agreement between Thistledove and its shareholders contains provisions relating to the governance of Thistledove. The agreement provides that certain matters require the prior consent of the holders of at least 75 per cent of the “B” and “C” ordinary shares. These include variations to the authorised or issued share capital, alterations to the articles of association and the appointment of directors (other than those directors appointed by the Institutional Investors). Certain matters also require the prior consent of the “B” Directors. These include the appointment of employees earning a basic salary of more than £100,000 per year, and the appointment of directors of subsidiaries. Certain matters also require the prior consent of the holders of at least 50 per cent of the “A” ordinary shares.

 

Thistledove has issued warrants with anti-dilution rights to subscribe for newly issued “B” ordinary shares representing 10 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of Thistledove at an exercise price equal to the nominal value of such “B” ordinary shares.

 

There were no significant changes in the percentage ownership held by any major shareholders during the past three years.

 

- 42 -


Table of Contents

Related Party Transactions

 

During Fiscal 2002, the holding company, Thistledove Limited, redeemed the whole of the Unsecured 7% Loan Notes 2008. J Lancaster and A R Cox, directors of TM Group Holdings Plc received £148,896 and £74,449 respectively in respect of this transaction. There were no related party transactions during Fiscal 2003 or Fiscal 2004.

 

Item 8. Financial Information

 

See “Item 18. Financial Statements” for details of the financial statements filed as part of this Annual Report.

 

Legal Proceedings

 

The Company is not currently party to, nor the subject of, any legal proceedings that may have a material effect on its financial position or profitability.

 

Dividend Policy

 

As a wholly owned subsidiary of Thistledove Limited, the Company is required to remit dividends from time to time to enable Thistledove to service any debt and to pay dividends to its C shareholders. Its debt at November 24, 2001 which was repaid during Fiscal 2002 arose through its participation in the acquisition of Tog Limited. Certain restrictions apply to the payment of dividends. These are fully described in the registration statement of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form F-4 on April 30, 1999 (File No. 333-9268).

 

Significant Changes

 

No significant change has occurred since November 27, 2004, the date of the financial statements.

 

Item 9. The Offer and Listing

 

Nature of Trading Market

 

On June 19, 1998, the Company made its initial submission of the Registration Statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission with respect to the exchange for the new Senior Notes of all old Senior Notes and for new Senior Subordinated Notes of all old Senior Subordinated Notes. The Registration Statement was declared effective on May 4, 1999. The new Senior Notes and the new Senior Subordinated Notes were issued on June 4, 1999. Although a substantial majority of the old Senior Notes and old Senior Subordinated Notes were exchanged for new Senior Notes and new Senior Subordinated Notes, respectively, some old Senior Notes and old Senior Subordinated Notes remain outstanding. The aggregate principal amount of the new Senior Notes and old Senior Notes is $145.3 million; the aggregate principal amount of the new Senior Subordinated Notes and old Senior Subordinated Notes is £53.3 million.

 

The Notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange, and have been accepted for clearance, directly or indirectly, through DTC, Euroclear and Clearstream, Luxembourg. Management does not have any reliable information as to the position of the Notes held in the US or the number of record holders of the Notes in the US.

 

Item 10. Additional Information

 

There are no material contacts, other than those entered into in the ordinary course of business, to which the Company has been a party from March 2003 to the present.

 

There are no foreign exchange controls currently in force that restrict the import or export of capital or that affect the remittance of interest or other payments to holders of Notes who are non-residents of the United Kingdom.

 

- 43 -


Table of Contents

There are no limitations relating to non-residents of the United Kingdom on the right to be a holder of, or to vote in respect of, the Notes under English law currently in force or in the Company’s Memorandum and Articles of Association.

 

Taxation

 

The summaries, set out below, describe certain material US federal income tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of the Notes by a “United States Holder”, as defined below, and certain material UK tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of the Notes. The statements regarding US and UK tax laws and practices set forth below, including the statements regarding the US/UK double taxation convention relating to income and capital gains (the “Tax Treaty”), assume that the Notes were issued, and transfers thereof and payments thereon were made, in accordance with the applicable Indenture and the applicable Note Depositary Agreement.

 

For purposes of the Tax Treaty and the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended to the date hereof (the “Code”), United States Holders of Book-Entry Interests will be treated as owners of the Notes underlying such Book-Entry Interests and, except as noted below, the tax consequences of owning Book-Entry Interests will be the same as those applicable to ownership of Notes.

 

As used herein, the term “United States Holder” means a beneficial owner that is (i) a citizen or resident of the United States for US federal income tax purposes, (ii) a corporation, or other entity treated as an alien corporation (for US federal income tax purposes), created or organized in or under the laws of the United States or of any political subdivision thereof, (iii) an estate the income of which is subject to US federal income tax without regard to its source or (iv) a trust if a court within the US is able to exercise primary supervision over the administration of the trust and one or more US persons (as defined in the Code) have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or a trust that has made a valid election under US Treasury regulations to be treated as a domestic trust. If a partnership holds Notes, the tax treatment of a partner will generally depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. If a United States Holder is a partner in a partnership holding Notes, it should consult its own tax advisor.

 

UNITED STATES HOLDERS OF NOTES ARE ADVISED TO CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS AS TO THE US, UK OR OTHER TAX CONSEQUENCES OF THE OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF NOTES, INCLUDING THE EFFECT OF ANY STATE, LOCAL OR FOREIGN TAX LAWS.

 

United States Taxation

 

The following summary of the principal US federal income tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of Notes deals only with Notes held as capital assets by United States Holders. This summary does not address all of the US federal income tax consequences hat may be relevant to a particular United States Holder in light of such United States Holder’s particular circumstances or to United States Holders subject to special rules such as but not limited to dealers in securities or currencies, traders in securities that elect mark-to-market tax accounting, banks, tax-exempt organisations, regulated investment companies, life insurance companies, persons subject to the alternative minimum tax, certain US expatriates, persons that hold Notes that are a hedge or that are hedged against currency or interest rate risks or that are part of a straddle or conversion transaction, persons that are not “United States Holders”, as defined above, or persons whose functional currency is not the US dollar. Investors who purchase the Notes at a price other than their respective offering price should consult their tax advisor as to the possible applicability to them of the amortisable bond premium or market discount rules. The summary is based on the Code, its legislative history, existing and proposed US Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect and all subject to change at any time, perhaps with retroactive effect.

 

United States Holders of Notes should consult their own tax advisors concerning the consequences, in their particular circumstances, under the Code and the laws of any other taxing jurisdiction, of the ownership and disposition of the Notes.

 

- 44 -


Table of Contents

Payments of Interest

 

Interest on Notes (including any UK tax withheld therefrom) will be taxable to a United States Holder as ordinary income at the time it is received or accrued, depending on the holder’s method of accounting for tax purposes.

 

A cash basis United States Holder that receives interest in sterling will, upon a payment of interest, recognize the US dollar value of the interest payment, based on the exchange rate in effect on the date of receipt, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US dollars.

 

An accrual basis United States Holder who receives interest in sterling may determine the amount of income recognized in accordance with either of two methods. Under the first method, the amount of income accrued will be based on the average exchange rate in effect during the interest accrual period (or, with respect to an accrual period that spans two taxable years, the part of the period within the taxable year).

 

Under the second method, the United States Holder may elect to determine the amount of income accrued on the basis of the exchange rate in effect on the last day of the accrual period or, in the case of an accrual period that spans two taxable years, the exchange rate in effect on the last day of the part of the period within the taxable year. Additionally, if a payment of interest is actually received within five business days of the last day of the accrual period or taxable year, an electing accrual basis Untied States Holder may instead translate such accrued interest into US dollars at the exchange rate in effect on the day of actual receipt. Any such election will apply to all debt instruments held by the United States Holder at the beginning of the first taxable year to which the election applies or thereafter acquired by the United States Holder, and will be irrevocable without the consent of the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”).

 

An accrual basis United States Holder recognises, as ordinary gain or loss, foreign currency exchange gain or loss with respect to accrued interest income on the date such income is actually received. The amount of gain or loss recognised equals the difference between the US dollar value of the foreign currency payment in respect of such accrual period determined based on the exchange rate on the date such payment is received and the US dollar value of interest income that has accrued during such accrual period as determined above.

 

For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, interest on the Notes will constitute foreign source income and will generally constitute “passive income” or, in the case of certain United States Holders, “financial services income”. United States Holders of Notes should consult their own tax advisors concerning foreign tax credit limitations.

 

Sale and Retirement of the Notes

 

A United States Holder will generally recognise gain or loss on the sale or retirement of a Note equal to the difference between the amount realised on the sale or retirement (other than amounts attributable to accrued interest, which will be taxable as such) and the tax basis of the Note (generally, the US dollar value of the purchase price for the Notes on the date of purchase). The amount realised on a sale or retirement for an amount in foreign currency will be the US dollar value of such amount on (i) the date payment is received in the case of a cash basis United States Holder, (ii) the date of disposition in the case of an accrual basis United States Holder or (iii) in the case of Notes traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable US Treasury regulations, sold by a cash basis United States Holder (or an accrual basis United States Holder that so elects), on the settlement date for the sale. Gain or loss recognised on the sale or retirement of a Note will be capital gain or loss except that the portion of such gain or loss attributable to changes in exchange rates will be treated as ordinary income or loss. A United States Holder will recognise US source exchange rate gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) on the sale or retirement of a Note equal to the difference, if any, between the US dollar values of the United States Holder’s purchase price for the Note (less any amount previously amortized) (i) on the date of sale and retirement or (ii) the date on which the United States Holder acquired the Note. Any such exchange rate gain or loss will be realised only to the extent of total gain or loss realised on the sale or retirement. Long-term capital gain of a non-

 

- 45 -


Table of Contents

corporate United States Holder is generally subject to a maximum tax rate of 15% (5% for tax payers in the 10% and 15% tax brackets) in respect of property held for more than one year. Limitations apply to the deductibility of capital losses by corporate and non-corporate United States Holders. Gain or loss realised by a United States Holder on the sale or a retirement of a Note generally will be US source gain or loss.

 

Amortizable Bond Premium

 

If a United States Holder purchased a Note for an amount greater than the principal amount of the Note, such United States Holder will be considered to have purchased such Note with “amortizable bond premium” equal in amount to such excess, as calculated in Sterling. The purchase amount will not include any amount paid with respect to accrued but unpaid interest on the Note at the time of acquisition. Generally, a United States Holder may elect to amortize such premium as an offset to interest income, using a constant yield method, over the remaining term of the Note. On each date the United States Holder offset interest income with amortizable bond premium, a United States Holder may recognise US source exchange gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) measured by the different between the spot rate in effect on that date and on the date the United States Holder acquired the Note multiplied by the amount of interest offset. A United States Holder that elects to amortize bond premium must reduce its tax basis in the Note by the amount of the premium used to offset interest income. An election to amortize bond premium applies to all taxable debt obligations held during or after the taxable year for which the election is made and may only be revoked with the consent of the IRS. A United States Holder that does not elect to amortize such premium as an offset to interest income will recognise a market loss upon the maturity of the Note.

 

Market Discount

 

A Note generally will be treated as purchased at a market discount if the Note’s principal amount exceeds the amount for which the United States Holder purchased the Note by at least 0.25 per cent of the Note’s principal amount multiplied by the number of complete years from the date acquired by the United States Holder to the Note’s maturity date. Any gain recognised on the maturity or disposition of a Note purchased at market discount will be treated as ordinary income to the extent that the gain does not exceed the accrued market discount on the Note. Alternatively, a United States Holder that purchases a Note with market discount may elect to include market discount in income over the life of the Note. This election will apply to all debt instruments acquired by the United States Holder on or after the first day of the first taxable year for which the election is made. This election may not be revoked without the consent of the IRS. A United States Holder that does not elect to include market discount in income currently generally will be required to defer deductions for interest on borrowing incurred to purchase or carry a Note purchased with market discount that is in excess of the interest on the Note includible in the United States Holder’s income, to the extent that the excess interest expense does not exceed the portion of the market discount allocable to the days on which the United States Holder held the Note.

 

Under current law, market discount will accrue on a straight-line basis unless the United States Holder elects to accrue the market discount on a constant yield method. This election applies only to the Note to which it is made and is irrevocable.

 

Market discount that is accrued by a United States Holder will be accrued in Sterling. If a United States Holder elects to include market discount in income currently, the accrued market discount will be translated into US dollars at the average exchange rate for the accrual period (or portion thereof within the United States Holder’s taxable year). Upon receipt of an amount attributable to accrued market discount, the United States Holder may recognise US source exchange gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) determined in the same manner as for accrued interest. A United States Holder that does not elect to include market discount in income currently will recognise, upon the disposition or maturity of a Note, the US dollar value of the amount accrued, calculated at the spot rate on that date, and no part of this accrued market discount will be treated as exchange gain or loss.

 

- 46 -


Table of Contents

Exchange of Sterling

 

A United States Holder will have a tax basis in sterling received as interest on or upon the sale or retirement of a Note equal to the US dollar value of such sterling, determined at the time the interest is received or at the time of the sale or retirement. Any gain or loss realized by a United States Holder on a sale or disposition of sterling generally will be treated as US source ordinary income or loss.

 

US Treasury regulations intended to address so-called tax shelters and other potentially tax-motivated transactions require reporting of foreign currency transactions. United States Holders of Notes should consult their own tax advisors concerning any possible disclosure obligation with respect to their investment in the Notes and should be aware that the Company and other participants in the transaction intend to comply with the disclosure and list- maintenance requirements under US Treasury regulations as they determine apply to them with respect to such transaction.

 

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

 

In general, information reporting requirements will apply to payments of principal and interest on a Note within the United States (including payments made by wire transfer from outside the United States to an account maintained by the holder with a fiscal or paying agent in the United States) to non-corporate holders, and “backup withholding” will apply to such payments if the holder fails to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number or is notified by the IRS that it has failed to report all interest and dividends required to be shown on its US federal income tax returns. Holders that are not United States Holders are generally exempt from backup withholding and information reporting requirements with respect to payments of principal and interest (assuming the income is otherwise exempt from US federal income tax), provided that they comply with certain certification and identification procedures in order to prove their exemption.

 

Payment of the proceeds from the sale of a Note to or through the US office of a broker may be subject to information reporting and backup withholding. A Holder that is not a US person will not be subject to information reporting and backup withholding if the holder or beneficial owner certifies as to its non-US status or otherwise establishes an exemption from information reporting and backup withholding.

 

Payment of interest or the proceeds from the sale of a Note made to or through a foreign office of a broker generally will not be subject to information reporting or backup withholding. If, however, the broker (i) is a US person, (ii) is a controlled foreign corporation for US federal income tax purposes, (iii) is a foreign person 50% or more of whose gross income is effectively connected with a US trade or business for a specified three-year period, or (iv) is a foreign partnership that has 50% or more of its income or capital interests held by US persons or is engaged in the conduct of a trade or business in the United States, information reporting (but generally not backup withholding) may apply to such payments.

 

UK Taxation

 

The discussion set out below describes the material UK tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of the Notes. The statements regarding UK tax laws and practices set forth below, including the statements regarding the US/UK double taxation convention relating to income and capital gains (the “Tax Treaty”) assume that the Notes were issued, and transfers thereof and payments thereon will be made, in accordance with the applicable Indenture and the applicable Note Depositary Agreement.

 

Except where noted, this summary of the material UK tax consequences of the ownership of the Notes relates only to the position of persons who are the absolute beneficial owners of their Notes and may not apply to special situations, such as those of dealers in securities. Furthermore, the discussion below is generally based upon the provisions of the UK tax laws and UK Inland Revenue practice as of the date hereof, and such provisions may be repealed, revoked or modified (possibly with retrospective effect) so as to result in UK income tax consequences different from those discussed below.

 

As used herein, the term “United Kingdom Holder” means an absolute beneficial owner of the Notes that

 

- 47 -


Table of Contents

owns those Notes as an investment and that is resident or, in the case of an individual, ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom for UK tax purposes, and “Holder” means any absolute beneficial owner of the Notes that owns those Notes as an investment.

 

Holders who are individuals should note that where any interest on Notes is paid to them (or to any person acting on their behalf) by the Company or by any person in the United Kingdom acting on behalf of the Company (a “paying agent”), or is received by any person in the United Kingdom acting on behalf of the relevant Holder (other than solely by clearing or arranging the clearing of a cheque) (a “collecting agent”), then the Company, the paying agent or the collecting agent (as the case may be) may, in certain cases, be required to supply to the UK Inland Revenue details of the payment and certain details relating to the Holder (including the Holder’s name and address). These provisions will apply whether or not the interest has been paid subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK income tax and whether or not the Holder is resident in the United Kingdom for UK taxation purposes. Where the Holder is not so resident, the details provided to the UK Inland Revenue may, in certain cases, be passed by the UK Inland Revenue to the tax authorities of the jurisdiction in which the Holder is resident for taxation purposes.

 

The provisions referred to above also apply, in certain circumstances, to payments made on redemption of any Notes where the amount payable on redemption is greater than the issue price of the Notes.

 

EU Savings Directive

 

On June 3, 2003 the EU Council of Economic and Finance Ministers adopted a new directive regarding the taxation of savings income. The directive is scheduled to be applied by Member States from July 1, 2005, provided that certain non-EU countries adopt similar measures from the same date. Under the directive, each Member State will be required to provide to the tax authorities of another Member State details of payments of interest or other similar income paid by a person within its jurisdiction to, or collected by such a person for an individual resident in that other Member State. However, Austria, Belgium and Luxembourg may instead apply a withholding system for a transitional period in relation to such payments, deducting tax at rates rising over time to 35 per cent. The transitional period is to commence on the date from which the directive is applied by Member States and will terminate at the end of the first full fiscal year following agreement by certain non-EU countries to the exchange of information relating to such payments.

 

Interest on the Global Notes

 

The Notes will constitute “quoted Eurobonds” provided that they are “listed on a recognised stock exchange”. Under a UK Inland Revenue interpretation of November 28, 2001, securities which are listed on a stock exchange in a country which is a member state of the European Union or which is part of the European Economic Area will be “listed on a recognised stock exchange” if they are listed by a competent authority in that country and are admitted to trading on a recognised stock exchange in that country; securities which are to be listed on a stock exchange in any other country will satisfy this requirement if they are admitted to trading on a recognised stock exchange in that country. The Notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange which is a recognised stock exchange for the purposes of the UK Inland Revenue’s interpretation, and therefore the Notes are “quoted Eurobonds”. On the basis that the Notes are quoted Eurobonds, payments of accrued interest on the Notes, to the extent such payments are payments of interest for UK income tax purposes, may be made without withholding or deduction for or on account of UK income tax.

 

Interest on the Notes constitutes UK-source income for UK tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding. However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a Holder who is not resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom unless that Holder carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the United Kingdom through a UK branch or agency in connection with which the interest is received or to which the Notes are attributable. There are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agent (such as some brokers and investment managers).

 

- 48 -


Table of Contents

Ownership and Disposal (including Redemption) by UK Corporation Tax Payers

 

In general Noteholders which are within the charge to UK corporation tax will be charged to tax on all returns on and fluctuations in value of the Notes (whether attributable to currency fluctuations or otherwise) broadly in accordance with their statutory accounting treatment. Such Noteholders will generally be charged to tax in each accounting period by reference to interest accrued in that period and any profit or loss which, in accordance with such Noteholders’ authorised accounting method, is applicable to that period.

 

Ownership and Disposal (including Redemption) by Other UK Tax Payers

 

Taxation of Chargeable Gains

 

The Senior Subordinated Notes constitute “qualifying corporate bonds” within the meaning of section 117 of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992. Accordingly, a disposal by a Holder of a holding of Senior Subordinated Notes will not give rise to a chargeable gain or an allowable loss for the purposes of the UK taxation of chargeable gains.

 

The Senior Notes do not constitute “qualifying corporate bonds” within the meaning of section 117 of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992. Therefore a disposal by a Holder of a holding of Senior Notes may give rise to a chargeable gain or allowable loss for the purpose of the UK taxation of chargeable gains.

 

Accrued Income Scheme

 

On a disposal of the Notes by a Holder, any interest which has accrued since the last interest payment date (or where no interest payment date has occurred, the issue of the Notes) may be chargeable to tax as income if that Holder is resident or ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom or carries on a trade in the United Kingdom through a branch or agency to which the Notes are attributable.

 

Stamp Duty and Stamp Duty Reserve Tax

 

No UK stamp duty or UK stamp duty reserve tax is payable on the issue or the transfer by delivery of the Notes.

 

Memorandum and Articles of Association

 

The following description summarises certain provisions of the memorandum and articles of association of TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Company”) and relevant applicable English law. It is a summary only and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Companies Act 1985, as amended (the “Act”) and by the memorandum of TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Memorandum”) and articles of association adopted by special resolution of the Company on 22 January 1999 (the “Articles”) which have been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form F-4 on April 30, 1999 (File No 333-09268) (the “Registration Statement”). The Articles of the Company incorporate Table A from the Companies (Tables A to F) Regulations 1985 (each regulation of which will be referred to as the “Regulation(s)”), modified and/or disapplied in each relevant case.

 

Company Details

 

TM Group Holdings PLC, (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated in England under registered number 03462566.

 

Objects and purposes

 

The Company is established with a wide objects clause which entitles it to carry on business as a general commercial company including to act as a general investment company. The articles authorise the company to do all things that are in the opinion of the directors incidental or conducive to the carrying on of all or any of the Company’s objects, and to exercise all or any of its powers.

 

- 49 -


Table of Contents

Directors’ Interests

 

Subject to the provisions of the Act, and provided that he has disclosed to the directors the nature and extent of any material interest of his, under Regulation 85 a director notwithstanding his office:

 

(a) may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any transaction or arrangement with the company or in which the company or in which the company is otherwise interested;

 

(b) may be a director or other officer of, or employed by, or a party to any transaction or arrangement with, or otherwise interested in, any body corporate promoted by the company or in which the Company is otherwise interested; and

 

(c) shall not, by reason of his office, be accountable to the company for any benefit which he derives from any such office or employment or from any such transaction or arrangement or from any interest in any such body corporate and no such transaction or arrangement shall be liable to be avoided on the ground of any such interest or benefit.

 

Compensation of Directors

 

The Memorandum and Articles of the Company do not contain any specific provisions other than Regulation 85 as described above.

 

Borrowing Powers

 

Under Regulation 70, the directors of the Company may exercise all the powers of the company. As such, in accordance with section 4 of the Memorandum, they may exercise all powers of the Company to borrow money and subject to provisions of the Act, to issue debt securities.

 

Age Limit Requirements

 

Under Article 17, no person is incapable of being appointed a director by reasons of his having reached the age of 70 or another age. Special notice is not required in connection with the appointment or the approval of the appointment of such person. No director is required to vacate his office because he has reached the age of 70 or another age and the Articles provide that section 293 of the Act (establishing age limits for directors) does not apply to the Company.

 

Shareholding for Director Qualification

 

No shareholding qualification for directors is required.

 

Shares in the Company

 

The issued share capital of the Company at the date hereof comprises ordinary shares only. All shares are currently owned by the Company’s immediate and ultimate parent undertaking and controlling party, Thistledove Limited, which is incorporated in England.

 

Dividends

 

The rights of shareholders relating to dividends are governed by Regulations 102 to 108. Under Regulation 102, subject to the provisions of the Act, the Company may by ordinary resolution declare dividends but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the directors. The directors may also pay interim dividends. No dividends may be paid out other than out of profits available for distribution. Any dividend which has remained unclaimed for twelve years from the date when it became due for payment shall, if the directors so resolve, be forfeited and cease to remain owing by the company.

 

- 50 -


Table of Contents

Under Article 23, the directors may deduct from a dividend or other amounts payable to a person in respect of a share any amounts due from him to the Company on account of a call or otherwise in relation to a share.

 

Voting Rights

 

Under Regulations 54 to 59 (as amended by the Articles) every member of the Company who (being an individual) is present in person or (being a corporation) is present by a duly authorised representative, not being himself a member entitled to vote, has on a show of hands one vote and on a poll every member has one vote for every share of which he is the holder. Voting at any meeting of the shareholders is by show of hands unless a poll is demanded (in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 46).

 

Subject to the provisions of the Act, a poll may be demanded:

 

(a) by the chairman; or

 

(b) by at least two members having the right to vote at the meeting; or

 

(c) by a member or members representing not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all the members having the right to vote at the meeting; or

 

(d) by a member or members holding shares conferring a right to vote at the meeting being shares on which an aggregate sum has been paid up equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right;

 

and a demand by a person as proxy for a member shall be the same as a demand by the member.

 

Holders of the Company’s ordinary shares do not have cumulative voting rights.

 

Under Article 14, the directors are not subject to retirement by rotation (i.e. directors do not stand for re-election at staggered intervals).

 

Under Article 15, the Company may by ordinary resolution appoint a person who is willing to act to be a director either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director. Under Article 16, a person so appointed by the directors is not required to retire from office at the annual general meeting next following his appointment. Pursuant to Article 16, the provisions of Regulation 79 to the effect that a person so appointed by directors must hold office only until the next following general meeting and cannot be taken into account in determining the directors who are to retire by rotation at the meeting, are disapplied. Pursuant to Article 16, the last sentence of Regulation 79 to the effect that if not reappointed at the next following annual general meeting following his appointment, a director must vacate office at the conclusion thereof, is disapplied.

 

Proceedings at General Meetings

 

Under the Regulation 40, two persons entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted, each being a member or a proxy for a member or a duly authorised representative of a corporation, shall be a quorum.

 

No member shall, unless the directors otherwise determine, vote at any general meeting or at any separate meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the company, either in person or by proxy, in respect of any share held by him unless all moneys presently payable by him in respect of that share have been paid (Regulation 57 as modified by Article 7).

 

On a poll votes may be given either personally or by proxy. A member may appoint more than one proxy to attend on the same occasion. Deposit of an instrument of proxy (which must be in writing in any usual form or in any other form which the directors may approve, and which must be executed by or on behalf of the appointor) does not preclude a member from attending and voting at the meeting or at any adjournment of it (Regulation 59 as modified by Articles 8 to 10).

 

- 51 -


Table of Contents

Under English law, shareholders of a public company such as the Company are not permitted to pass resolutions by written consent.

 

Liquidation Rights

 

In the event of the liquidation of the Company, after payment of all liabilities, the remaining assets would be shared equally by the holders of the ordinary shares. However, under Regulation 117, the liquidator may, with the sanction of an extraordinary resolution of the company and any other sanction required by the Act, divide among the members in specie the whole or any part of the assets of the company and may, for that purpose, value any assets and determine how the division shall be carried out as between the members or different classes of members. The liquidator may, with the like sanction, vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of the members as he with the like sanction determines, but no member shall be compelled to accept any assets upon which there is a liability.

 

Under Regulation 34, subject to the provisions of the Act, the company may by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve and any share premium account in any way. There are no sinking fund provisions in the Articles.

 

Calls on Shares

 

Under Regulation 12, subject to the terms of allotment, the directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares (whether in respect of nominal value or premium) and each member shall (subject to receiving at least fourteen clear days’ notice specifying when and where payment is to be made) pay to the company as required by the notice the amount called on his shares. A call may be required to be paid by instalments.

 

Under Regulation 15, if a call remains unpaid after it has become due and payable the person from whom it is due and payable shall pay interest on the amount unpaid from the day it became due and payable until it is paid at the rate fixed by the terms of allotment of the share or in the notice of the call or, if no rate is fixed, at the appropriate rate (as defined by the Act) but the directors may waive payment of the interest wholly or in part.

 

Under Regulation 18, if a call remains unpaid after it has become due and payable the directors may give to the person from whom it is due not less than fourteen clear days’ notice requiring payment of the amount unpaid together with any interest which may have accrued. If the notice is not complied with any share in respect of which it was given may, before the payment required by the notice has been made, be forfeited by a resolution of the directors and the forfeiture shall include all dividends or other moneys payable in respect of the forfeited shares and not paid before the forfeiture.

 

Shareholders owning a substantial number of shares

 

There are no provisions discriminating against any existing or prospective holder of such securities as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial amount of shares.

 

Pre-emption Rights

 

Under Section 80 of the Act, directors are, with certain exceptions, unable to allot relevant securities without the authority of the shareholders in a general meeting. Relevant securities, as defined in the Act, include the Company’s ordinary shares or securities convertible into TM Group Holding PLC’s ordinary shares. In addition, Section 89 of the Act imposes further restrictions on the issue of equity securities (as defined in the Act, which include TM Group Holding PLC’s ordinary shares and securities convertible into ordinary shares) which are, or are to be, paid up wholly in cash and not first offered to existing shareholders, except insofar as such statutory pre-emption rights have been disapplied in accordance with Section 95 of the Act.

 

- 52 -


Table of Contents

Modifications to Rights of Holders

 

Under section 125 of the Act, the rights attached to a class of shares may be varied whether or not the Company is being wound up, with the consent in writing of the holders of at least three-fourths of the nominal value of the issued ordinary shares or upon the adoption of an extraordinary resolution passed at a meeting of the ordinary holders of the issued ordinary shares validly held in accordance with the articles, but not otherwise.

 

The rights attached to a class of shares are not, unless otherwise expressly provided in the rights attaching to those shares, deemed to be varied by the creation, allotment or issue of further shares ranking pari passu with or subsequent to them or by the purchase or redemption by the Company of its own shares.

 

Meetings

 

Under Regulation 37 as amended by Article 5, the directors may call annual or extraordinary general meetings and, on the requisition of members pursuant to the provisions of the Act, shall forthwith proceed to convene an extraordinary general meeting for a date not later than 28 days after receipt of the requisition. If there are not within the United Kingdom sufficient directors to call a general meeting, any director or any member of the company may call a general meeting.

 

Under the Act, the Company shall hold a general meeting as its annual general meeting every year and not more than 15 months may elapse between annual general meetings.

 

Under Regulation 38, an annual general meeting and an extraordinary general meeting called for the passing of a special resolution shall be called by not less than 21 clear days’ notice. All other extraordinary general meetings shall be called by not less than 14 clear days’ notice.

 

The notice shall specify the time and place of the meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted and, in the case of an annual general meeting, shall specify the meeting as such.

 

Subject to the provisions of the articles and to any restrictions imposed on any shares, the notice shall be given to all the members, to all persons entitled to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member and to the directors and auditors.

 

Under Regulation 40, no business may be transacted at a general meeting unless a quorum is present. No business shall be transacted at any meeting unless a quorum is present. Two persons entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted, each being a member or a proxy for a member or a duly authorised representative of a corporation, shall be a quorum.

 

Under Regulation 41, if such a quorum is not present within half an hour from the time appointed for the meeting, or if during a meeting such a quorum ceases to be present, the meeting shall stand adjourned to the same day in the next week at the same time and place or such time and place as the directors may determine.

 

There are no other conditions of admission to the meeting.

 

Limitations on Rights

 

There are no limitations on the rights to own securities, including the rights of non-resident or foreign shareholders to hold or exercise voting rights.

 

Change of Control

 

Under Article 4, the directors may, at their discretion, refuse to register the transfer of shares. Apart from this provision, there are no provisions of the Articles, charter or bylaws that would have an effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a change in control of the Company.

 

- 53 -


Table of Contents

Disclosure of Share Ownership Interests

 

There are no provisions of the Articles, charter or bylaws governing the ownership threshold above which shareholder ownership must be disclosed.

 

Material Contracts

 

Provided as an exhibit at Item 19 are copies of the following contracts:

 

Agreement for the sale and purchase of Dillons Stores Limited from a subsidiary of Tesco plc.

 

On August 21, 2004, a subsidiary of the Company paid to a subsidiary of Tesco plc the sum of £1,925,180, net of cash acquired with the business, for the entire share capital of Dillons Stores Limited. A further sum of £4,569,000 was paid during October 2004 for the stock acquired as part of this transaction. Further consideration of £1,952,950 has since been paid 6 months after the completion date, with a further £1,952,950 and £2,441,150 payable respectively 12 and 18 months after the completion date. Tesco plc has given certain warranties and indemnities to the Company in relation to the company purchased.

 

Agreement with HBOS for the renewal of the £20 million working capital facility

 

The Halifax Bank of Scotland (HBOS) facility is renewable on an annual basis. The Company has recently chosen to extend this facility for shorter periods in order to maximise its flexibility. The most recent renewal, signed on December 21, 2004, is for a period of 6 months.

 

Documents on Display

 

It is possible to read and copy documents referred to in this annual report on Form 20-F that have been filed with the SEC at the SEC’s public reference room located at 450 Fifth Street, NW, Washington, DC 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges.

 

Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

 

Refer to Note 20 of Notes to the Financial Statements.

 

Item 12. Description of Securities other than Equity Securities

 

Not applicable

 

- 54 -


Table of Contents

PART II

 

Item 13. Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies

 

None

 

Item 14. Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds

 

None

 

Item 15. Controls and Procedures

 

As of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report, management, including the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Finance Director, evaluated the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures. Based upon, and as of the date of that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Finance Director concluded that the disclosure controls and procedures were effective, in all material respects, to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports the Company files and submits under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarised and reported as and when required, subject to the following:

 

In January 2005, the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm, Ernst & Young LLP, reported to TM Group Holdings PLC’s audit committee and management that Ernst & Young LLP considered that there was insufficient knowledge and experience of US GAAP in the Company’s corporate accounting department and that Ernst & Young considered this matter to be a reportable condition (as defined under standards adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board) representing a material weakness in the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting. Ernst & Young LLP has provided an unqualified audit report on the Company’s financial statements for Fiscal 2002 and Fiscal 2003.

 

In order to address this weakness, management are currently reviewing their resources and considering the changes necessary to remediate this deficiency and to improve the US GAAP reporting process. Options being considered include establishing procedures for the necessary periodic updates by external accounting advisors.

 

Subject to the foregoing, since November 27, 2004 there have been no significant changes in the Company’s internal financial controls or in other factors that could significantly affect internal financial controls.

 

Item 16A. Audit Committee Financial Expert

 

The Audit Committee comprises non-executive directors David Symondson and Mark Dunfoy. The Company considers both to be “audit committee financial experts” as that term is defined in the SEC rules implementing Section 407 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

 

Item 16B. Code of Ethics

 

The Company has not adopted a “Code of Ethics” as defined under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act because its shares are not listed on a stock exchange. The Company is not required to have a Code of Ethics under the laws governing public limited companies in England and Wales.

 

- 55 -


Table of Contents
Item 16C. Principal Accountant Fees and Services

 

In accordance with Section 10A (i) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, before the accountant is engaged by the Company or its subsidiaries to render audit or non-audit services, the engagement is approved by the Company’s Audit Committee.

 

The aggregate fees billed to, or accrued by, the Company in respect of Ernst & Young LLP are analysed as follows:

 

    

Fiscal

2003


  

Fiscal

2004


     (£ thousands)

Charged to operating income:

         

Audit fees

   240    295
    
  

Tax fees:

         

Compliance

   177    124

Advice

   33    —  

Other fees:

         

Special projects

   214    125

Pension advice

   8    —  
    
  
     432    249
    
  

Total charged to operating income

   672    544

Charged to other income:

         

VAT reclaim

   —      123

Amount capitalised on acquisition

   —      102
    
  
     672    769
    
  

 

Item 16D. Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees

 

Not applicable

 

Item 16E. Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers

 

Not applicable

 

- 56 -


Table of Contents

PART III

 

Item 17. Financial Statements

 

Not applicable

 

Item 18. Financial Statements

 

The following consolidated financial statements and related schedule, together with the report thereon of Ernst & Young LLP, are filed as part of this annual report:

 

     Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   F-1

Consolidated Financial Statements

Consolidated Profit and Loss Accounts for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   F-2

Consolidated Balance Sheets at November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   F-3

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholder’s Funds for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   F-4

Consolidated Cash Flow Statements for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   F-5

Notes to the Financial Statements

   F-6

Schedule for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004 Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

   S-1

 

- 57 -


Table of Contents
Item 19. Exhibits

 

  1.1    Articles of Association of TM Group Holdings PLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of Amendment No.3 to the registration statement of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form F-4 on February 24, 1999 (File No. 333-9268)).
  2.1    Indenture, dated as of May 14, 1998, between TM Group Holdings PLC and Bankers Trust Company, London Branch, as Trustee, in respect of TM Group Holdings PLC’s 11% Senior Notes due May 15, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of Amendment to the registration statement of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form F-4 on June 19, 1999 (File No. 333-9268)).
  2.2    Indenture, dated as of May 14, 1998, between TM Group Holdings PLC and Bankers Trust Company, London Branch, as Trustee, in respect of TM Group Holdings PLC’s 12¼% Senior Subordinated Notes due May 15, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the registration statement of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form F-4 on April 30, 1999 (File No. 333-9268)).
  4.1    Agreement for the sale and purchase of TM Group Limited and its subsidiaries, dated as of July 20, 2001, between TM Group Holdings PLC, Compass Group, UK and Ireland Limited, James Lancaster and Russell Cox (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of Annual Report of TM Group Holdings PLC submitted on Form 20-F on March 20, 2001 (File No. 333-9268))
  4.2    Agreement for the sale and purchase of Dillons Stores Limited dated as of August 21, 2004 between Forbuoys Limited, Tesco plc and Statusfloat Limited.
  4.3    Agreement for the provision of a £20 million working capital facility between Halifax Bank of Scotland and various subsidiaries of the Company as most recently renewed December 21, 2004.
8.    List of principal subsidiaries
12.1    Section 302 Certification of Chief Executive Officer furnished as required by Rule 13a – 14(a) or Rule 15d – 14(a)
12.2    Section 302 Certification of Chief Financial Officer furnished as required by Rule 13a – 14(a) or Rule 15d – 14(a)
13.1    Section 906 Certification of Chief Executive Officer furnished as required by Rule 13a – 14(b) or Rule 15d – 14(b)
13.2    Section 906 Certification of Chief Financial Officer furnished as required by Rule 13a – 14(b) or Rule 15d – 14(b).

 

- 58 -


Table of Contents

 

SIGNATURES

 

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC (REGISTRANT)

By:  

/s/    JONATHAN MILLER        


   

Name:

  Jonathan Miller
   

Title:

  Chief Financial Officer

 

MARCH 23, 2005

 


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

 

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To The Board of Directors

TM Group Holdings PLC

 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of TM Group Holdings PLC at November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004, and the related consolidated profit and loss accounts and consolidated statements of total recognised gains and losses, changes in shareholder’s funds and cash flows for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004. Our audits also included the financial statement schedule listed in the Index at Item 18. These financial statements and schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements and schedule based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with United Kingdom auditing standards and United States generally accepted auditing standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of TM Group Holdings PLC at November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004, and the consolidated results of its operations and its consolidated cash flows for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 and the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom which differ in certain respects from those generally accepted in the United States (see Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements). Also, in our opinion, the related financial statement schedule, when considered in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly in all material respects the information set forth therein.

 

ERNST & YOUNG LLP

 

London, England

March 23, 2005

 

F -1-


Table of Contents

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

CONSOLIDATED PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNTS

 

     Notes

  

53 weeks
ended

November 30,

2002


    52 weeks ended

 
          November 29,
2003


   

November 27,

2004


 
          (£ thousands)  

Sales

   3                   

Ongoing operations

        664,461     635,453     619,849  

Acquired operations

        —       —       21,670  
         

 

 

          664,461     635,453     641,519  
         

 

 

Cost of sales

                       

Ongoing operations

        (502,974 )   (472,952 )   (459,660 )

Acquired operations

        —       —       (16,532 )
         

 

 

          (502,974 )   (472,952 )   (476,192 )
         

 

 

Gross profit

        161,487     162,501     165,327  

Selling and distribution costs

        (125,157 )   (127,968 )   (131,420 )

Administrative expenses

                       

Before exceptional items

        (18,063 )   (15,882 )   (16,974 )

Exceptional items – ongoing operations

   4    (759 )   —       (1,236 )
         

 

 

          (143,979 )   (143,850 )   (149,630 )
         

 

 

Operating profit:

                       

Ongoing operations

   5    17,508     18,651     15,373  

Acquired operations

        —       —       324  
         

 

 

          17,508     18,651     15,697  

Profit on sale of fixed assets – ongoing operations

        3,907     3,908     4,154  

Profit from discontinued operations

   6    —       —       1,573  
         

 

 

Profit before interest and taxation

        21,415     22,559     21,424  

Net interest payable and similar charges

   9    (20,532 )   (12,094 )   (8,426 )
         

 

 

Profit before taxation

        883     10,465     12,998  

Taxation

   10    (139 )   (2,021 )   (4,758 )
         

 

 

Profit for the period(i)

        744     8,444     8,240  

Equity dividends

   11    (22,450 )   —       —    
         

 

 

(Loss)/profit retained for the period(ii)

        (21,706 )   8,444     8,240  
         

 

 


(i) A summary of the significant adjustments to profit for the period that would be required if US generally accepted accounting principles were to be applied instead of those generally accepted in the United Kingdom is set out in Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements.

 

(ii) The Company has no recognised gains or losses other than the profit shown in the profit and loss account, and therefore no separate statement of total recognised gains and losses has been presented.

 

THE NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF THESE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.

 

F -2-


Table of Contents

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

 

     Notes

   November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
          (£ thousands)  

Fixed assets

                 

Goodwill

   12    7,533     15,777  

Tangible assets

   13    47,728     45,747  
         

 

          55,261     61,524  
         

 

Current assets

                 

Inventories

   15    34,115     38,880  

Debtors

   16    27,844     31,868  

Other current assets

   17    177     —    

Cash at bank and in hand

        25,625     15,237  
         

 

          87,761     85,985  
         

 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

                 

Trade creditors

        (68,091 )   (57,746 )

Other liabilities

   18    (17,026 )   (26,521 )
         

 

          (85,117 )   (84,267 )
         

 

Net current assets

        2,644     1,718  
         

 

Total assets less current liabilities

        57,905     63,242  
         

 

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

                 

Loans

   19    (136,240 )   (128,949 )

Other liabilities

        (697 )   (3,100 )
         

 

          (136,937 )   (132,049 )
         

 

Provisions for liabilities and charges

   21    (2,159 )   (4,052 )
         

 

Net liabilities

        (81,191 )   (72,859 )
         

 

Capital and reserves(i)

Called up share capital

        212     212  

Share premium account

        20,527     20,527  

Other reserves

        (59,892 )   (59,892 )

Profit and loss account

        (42,038 )   (33,706 )
         

 

Equity shareholder’s funds (deficit)

        (81,191 )   (72,859 )
         

 


(i) A summary of the significant adjustments to shareholder’s deficit that would be required if US generally accepted accounting principles were to be applied instead of those generally accepted in the United Kingdom is set out in Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements.

 

THE NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF THESE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.

 

F -3-


Table of Contents

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDER’S FUNDS

 

Share Capital

 

     Equity Shares

    

Ordinary

Shares of

1p each


     (Number)    (£)
     (in thousands)

Authorised

         

Balance at November 25, 2001, November 30, 2002, November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   26,235    262
    
  

Issued

         

Balance at November 25, 2001, November 30, 2002, November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004

   21,235    212
    
  

 

Shareholder’s Funds

 

    

Share

capital


  

Share

premium

account (i)


  

Other

reserves (i)


    Profit and
loss
account (ii)


   

Total

Shareholder’s

funds


 
     (£ thousands)  

Balance at November 25, 2001

   212    20,527    (59,892 )   (29,076 )   (68,229 )

Profit for the period

   —      —      —       744     744  

Goodwill previously written off in respect of disposals

   —      —      —       300     300  

Dividends paid and proposed

   —      —      —       (22,450 )   (22,450 )
    
  
  

 

 

Balance at November 30, 2002

   212    20,527    (59,892 )   (50,482 )   (89,635 )

Profit for the period

   —      —      —       8,444     8,444  
    
  
  

 

 

Balance at November 29, 2003

   212    20,527    (59,892 )   (42,038 )   (81,191 )

Goodwill previously written off in respect of disposals

   —      —      —       92     92  

Profit for the period

   —      —      —       8,240     8,240  
    
  
  

 

 

Balance at November 27, 2004

   212    20,527    (59,892 )   (33,706 )   (72,859 )
    
  
  

 

 


(i) Share premium account and other reserves are not distributable. A capital redemption reserve of £50,000 is included with other reserves.

 

(ii) Profit and loss account includes £92,460,000 (2003: £92,552,000, 2002: £92,552,000) goodwill written off.

 

THE NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF THESE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.

 

F -4-


Table of Contents

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

 

     Notes

  

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
          November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
          (£ thousands)  

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   23    19,617     24,970     16,982  

Returns on investments and servicing of finance

                       

Interest received

        2,352     219     819  

Interest paid

        (23,209 )   (16,460 )   (15,439 )

Premia on redemption of loans and Senior and Senior Subordinated Notes

        (1,950 )   —       —    
         

 

 

          (22,807 )   (16,241 )   (14,620 )
         

 

 

Taxation

                       

Corporation tax (paid)/refunded

        (1,691 )   311     (2,492 )
         

 

 

Capital expenditure and financial investment

                       

Payments to acquire tangible fixed assets

        (8,686 )   (8,764 )   (9,218 )

Receipts from sale of tangible fixed assets

        5,692     6,817     7,387  
         

 

 

          (2,994 )   (1,947 )   (1,831 )
         

 

 

Acquisitions and disposals

                       

Receipts from sale of businesses

   14    2,458     1,250     1,250  

Purchase of businesses

   14    (2,520 )   (2,676 )   (21,048 )

Cash acquired with businesses

   14    —       —       10,798  

VAT refund in respect of discontinued business

   6    —       —       1,573  
         

 

 

          (62 )   (1,426 )   (7,427 )
         

 

 

Management of liquid resources

                       

Decrease/(increase) in short-term deposits

        83,394     (1,262 )   8,008  
         

 

 

Equity dividends paid

        (22,450 )   —       —    
         

 

 

Net cash inflow before financing

        53,007     4,405     (1,380 )

Financing

                       

Redemption of Senior and Senior Subordinated Notes

   23    (21,486 )   —       —    

Repayment of loans

   23    (30,287 )   —       —    

Purchase of hedging instruments

        —       (1,452 )   (1,000 )

Repayment of capital element of finance lease rentals

   23    (3 )   —       —    
         

 

 

          (51,776 )   (1,452 )   (1,000 )
         

 

 

Increase/(decrease) in cash (excluding short-term deposits)

   23    1,231     2,953     (2,380 )
         

 

 


The significant differences between the cash flow statements presented above and those required under US generally accepted accounting principles are set out in Note 29 of Notes to the Financial Statements.

 

THE NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF THESE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.

 

F -5-


Table of Contents

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

1. The Company

 

On May 14, 1998, TM Group Holdings PLC (“the Company”) acquired the whole of the issued share capital of TM Group Holdings Limited (which was then renamed TM Group Limited) (“Limited”) in return for the issue of new shares in itself and the payment of cash to the shareholders of Limited (the “May Recapitalisation”). On that date the Company sold $175 million of 11% Senior Notes Due 2008 and £55 million of Senior Subordinated Notes Due 2008, a proportion of the net proceeds of which were used to fund the cash payments to the shareholders of Limited. The acquisition of Limited by the Company has been accounted for as a group reorganisation using merger accounting principles and, accordingly, the historical amounts reflected in the consolidated financial statements of Limited have been carried over into the consolidated financial statements of the Company.

 

On November 28, 1998, a subsidiary of the Company acquired the entire issued share capital of Tog Limited. As part of the financing of that acquisition, the entire issued share capital of the Company was acquired by Thistledove Limited which subscribed 20,734,550 “B” ordinary shares in Holdings at £1 each (the “November Recapitalisation”).

 

2. Accounting Policies

 

Accounting convention

 

The financial statements are prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with applicable United Kingdom accounting standards.

 

Revenue recognition

 

Sales are recognised as they are made. Revenue from the sale of instant lottery tickets and mobile phone vouchers is recognised gross as part of sales. Commission from the sale of on-line lottery tickets and electronic phone top-ups is recognised within sales.

 

Basis of Consolidation

 

The consolidated financial statements consolidate the accounts of TM Group Holdings PLC and all its subsidiary undertakings (together, the “Group”) drawn up on November 30, 2002, November 29, 2003 and November 27, 2004.

 

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared using merger accounting principles, reflecting the fact that the ownership and control of the Group remained with the same shareholders after the May 1998 and November 1998 Recapitalisations. Schedule 4A to the Companies Act 1985 and Financial Reporting Standard 6, “Acquisitions and Mergers”, require business combinations which include a substantial cash element to be accounted for using acquisition accounting principles. The use of acquisition accounting would give rise to goodwill on consolidation. As there was no arm’s length acquisition price in the recapitalisation, the resulting goodwill would not be a meaningful amount. In addition, as there was no external acquiring party, such goodwill would in effect be self-generated goodwill. In the opinion of the directors, the acquisition method of accounting would not result in a true and fair view of either the results of operations or financial position of the Group. No quantification of this departure is given as to do so would be misleading.

 

All subsidiaries acquired since May 1998 have been included in the consolidated financial statements using the acquisition method of accounting.

 

Goodwill

 

Goodwill arising on acquisitions prior to November 28, 1998 was set off directly against reserves. Goodwill previously eliminated against reserves has not been reinstated on implementation of Financial Reporting Standard 10 “Goodwill and Intangible Assets” (“FRS10”).

 

F -6-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2. Accounting Policies (continued)

 

Positive goodwill arising on acquisitions since November 28, 1998 is capitalised, classified as an asset on the balance sheet and amortised on a straight-line basis over its useful economic life up to a presumed maximum of 20 years. It is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full financial year following the acquisition and in other periods if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable.

 

If a subsidiary or business is subsequently sold or closed, any goodwill arising on acquisition that was written off directly to reserves or that has not been amortised through the profit and loss account is reviewed for impairment and if such goodwill is not considered to be attached to the continuing business it is taken into account in determining the profit or loss on sale or closure.

 

Depreciation

 

Depreciation is calculated so as to write off the cost of tangible fixed assets less their estimated residual values on a straight-line basis over the expected useful economic lives of the assets concerned. Principal rates used for this purpose are:

 

Land and buildings

         

Freehold (including land where it is not separately identifiable)

      50 years

Long leaseholds improvements

      50 years

Short leaseholds improvements –shops

      10 years

                                                              –other

      the term of the lease

Leasehold premiums

      the unexpired portion of the lease

Plant and machinery

         

Motor vehicles

      4 years

Computer equipment

      between 3 and 6 yrs

Furniture and fittings

      between 5 and 10 yrs

 

The carrying value of tangible fixed assets is reviewed for impairment if events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may not be recoverable.

 

Stocks

 

Stocks are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost of goods for resale is calculated for each category of stock by reducing the net selling price by the attributable average gross margin. Net realisable value is the price at which the stocks can be realised in the normal course of the business.

 

Volume rebates

 

Volume discounts receivable from manufacturers are recognised as a credit to cost of sales in the period in which the stock to which the volume discounts apply is sold.

 

Taxation

 

Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid using the tax rates and laws that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, at the balance sheet date.

 

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date where transactions or events have occurred at that date that will result in an obligation to pay more or a right to pay less or to receive more tax.

 

Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider that it is more likely than not that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the future reversal of the underlying timing differences can be deducted.

 

F -7-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2. Accounting Policies (continued)

 

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences reverse, based on tax rates and laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

 

Foreign currencies

 

Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded at the rates of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities, including the Senior Notes, denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date or if appropriate at the forward contract rate. All differences on translation are taken to the profit and loss account.

 

The Group manages its exposure to foreign currency fluctuation by the use of options and forward foreign currency contracts. Premiums paid on entering into options are marked to market at the end of each period and the resulting gain or loss is expensed in the profit and loss account.

 

Capital instruments

 

Shares are included in shareholder’s funds. Other instruments are classified as liabilities if they contain an obligation to transfer economic benefits and if not they are included in shareholder’s funds. The finance cost recognised in the profit and loss account in respect of capital instruments other than equity shares is allocated to periods over the term of the instrument at a constant rate on the carrying amount.

 

Derivative instruments

 

The Group considers its derivative instruments qualify for hedge accounting when certain criteria are met.

 

Forward foreign currency contracts

 

The criteria for forward foreign currency contracts are:

 

  the instrument must be related to a foreign currency asset or liability that is likely to crystallise and whose characteristics have been identified,

 

  it must involve the same currency as the hedged item, and

 

  it must reduce the risk of foreign currency exchange movements on the Group’s operations.

 

Leases

 

Costs in respect of operating leases are charged on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Lease agreements which transfer to the Group substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of an asset, are treated as if they had been purchased outright. The assets are included in fixed assets and the capital element of the leasing commitments is shown as obligations under finance leases. The lease rentals are treated as consisting of capital and interest elements. The capital element is applied to reduce the outstanding obligations and the interest element is charged against profit so as to give a constant periodic rate of charge on the remaining balance outstanding at each accounting period. Assets held under finance leases are depreciated over the shorter of the lease terms and the useful lives of equivalent owned assets.

 

Pensions

 

The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes, in addition to several defined contribution schemes, which require contributions to be made to separately administered funds. The cost of contributions to the defined benefit schemes is charged in the profit and loss account so as to spread the cost of pensions over the employees’ working lives within the Group. The regular cost is attributed to individual years using the projected unit credit method. Variations in pension cost, which are identified as a result of actuarial valuations, are amortised over the average expected remaining working lives of employees in proportion to their expected payroll costs. Differences between the amounts funded and the amounts charged in the profit and loss account are treated as either accruals or prepayments in the balance sheet. Actuarial valuations are undertaken periodically. Additional disclosures have been made in accordance with the transitional requirements of FRS 17 - Retirement Benefits.

 

F -8-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2. Accounting Policies (continued)

 

Advertising

 

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred.

 

Use of estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported sales, expenses, assets and liabilities. Actual amounts could differ from such estimates.

 

F -9-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

3. Segmental Analysis

 

     Restated 53
weeks ended
November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Sales

                  

Ongoing operations

   664,461     635,453     619,849  

Acquired operations

   —       —       21,670  
    

 

 

     664,461     635,453     641,519  
    

 

 

Cost of sales

                  

Ongoing operations

   (502,974 )   (472,952 )   (459,660 )

Acquired operations

   —       —       (16,532 )
    

 

 

     (502,974 )   (472,952 )   (476,192 )
    

 

 

Selling, distribution and advertising costs

                  

Ongoing operations

   (125,157 )   (127,968 )   (127,156 )

Acquired operations

   —       —       (4,264 )
    

 

 

     (125,157 )   (127,968 )   (131,420 )
    

 

 

Administrative expenses

                  

Ongoing operations

                  

Retailing

   (14,775 )   (12,526 )   (13,761 )

Central

   (3,288 )   (3,356 )   (2,663 )

Acquired operations

   —       —       (550 )
    

 

 

     (18,063 )   (15,882 )   (16,974 )
    

 

 

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

                  

Ongoing operations

                  

Retailing

   21,555     22,007     19,272  

Central costs

   (3,288 )   (3,356 )   (2,663 )
    

 

 

     18,267     18,651     16,609  

Acquired operations

   —       —       324  
    

 

 

     18,267     18,651     16,933  

Profit on sale of fixed assets – ongoing operations

   3,907     3,908     4,154  

Profit from discontinued businesses

   —       —       1,573  

Business restructuring

   (759 )   —       (1,236 )
    

 

 

     21,415     22,559     21,424  
    

 

 

Capital expenditure

                  

Ongoing operations

                  

Retailing

   8,686     8,757     9,141  

Central

   —       7     77  
    

 

 

     8,686     8,764     9,218  
    

 

 

Depreciation and amortisation

                  

Ongoing operations

                  

Retailing

   10,669     10,471     10,820  

Central

   61     63     48  
    

 

 

     10,730     10,534     10,868  
    

 

 

 

F -10-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

Net Assets

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Allocated net assets

            

Retailing

   25,542     38,166  

Unallocated net liabilities

   (106,733 )   (111,025 )
    

 

     (81,191 )   (72,859 )
    

 

Unallocated net liabilities comprise

            

Fixed assets

   92     87  

Pension asset

   5,612     8,393  

Other debtors

   2,695     1,325  

Other current assets

   177     —    

Cash at bank and in hand

   25,625     15,237  

Corporation tax

   (2,789 )   (3,353 )

Deferred taxation

   60     (1,998 )

Other creditors and accruals

   (1,965 )   (1,767 )

Bank and other loans

   (136,240 )   (128,949 )
    

 

     (106,733 )   (111,025 )
    

 

 

Total Assets

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Continuing operations

         

Retailing

   108,761    122,467

Central

   34,261    25,042
    
  
     143,022    147,509
    
  

 

4. Operating Exceptional Items

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

      November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Dillons integration costs

   —      —      258

Redundancies

   759    —      978
    
  
  
     759    —      1,236
    
  
  

 

Redundancy costs arose in the restructuring of both the TM Retail business and central administration function. £1,149,000 of these exceptional items in Fiscal 2004 was settled in cash during the period ended November 27, 2004.

 

5. Operating Profit

 

Operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Advertising

   47     32     75  

Auditors’ remuneration

                  

— audit services

   215     240     295  

— non-audit services

   258     432     249  

Amortisation of goodwill

   257     398     553  

Depreciation of owned assets

   10,454     10,136     10,315  

Depreciation of assets held under finance leases

   19     —       —    

Operating lease payments

                  

— land and buildings

   25,580     26,387     27,656  

— plant and machinery

   15     8     116  

Operating lease income

                  

— land and buildings

   (3,421 )   (3,655 )   (4,066 )

 

F -11-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

6. Profit from Discontinued Operations

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

 
        November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

VAT refund arising from a European Court of Justice ruling on vending machine site rentals

   —      —      1,696  

Related professional fees

   —      —      (123 )
    
  
  

     —      —      1,573  
    
  
  

 

7. Directors’ Remuneration

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

        November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Emoluments

   945    1,620    1,593

Company contribution to money purchase pension scheme

   —      101    114

Amounts paid to third parties for services of directors

   41    42    40
    
  
  
     986    1,763    1,747
    
  
  

 

The emoluments for Fiscal 2004 include compensation of £518,866 paid to one director on leaving the Company. This cost is part of the operating exceptional items shown in Note 4 to these accounts.

 

Three directors were members of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme (2003: two; 2002: three).

 

The remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of the highest paid director for the 52 weeks ended November 27, 2004 was £386,250 (2003: £509,683, 2002: £399,000). Contributions to that director’s personal pension arrangement totalled £113,884 (2003: £100,713, 2002: nil). The remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of the highest paid director for the 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 was £854,000 and his accrued pension benefit was £46,475. The remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of the highest paid director for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002 was £399,000 and his accrued pension benefit was £272,565.

 

Company contributions for one director were made to a money purchase scheme (2003: one; 2002: none).

 

8. Staff Costs

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

        November 29,
2003


   November 30,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Wages and salaries

   79,820    79,110    81,856

Social security costs

   4,417    4,784    5,023

Other pension costs

   819    641    297
    
  
  
     85,056    84,535    87,176
    
  
  

 

The above staff costs exclude directors emoluments

 

The average weekly number of employees during the period excluding directors was as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

        November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


          (number)     

Continuing businesses

              

Retailing

   10,530    10,395    10,562

Central

   6    6    6
    
  
  
     10,536    10,401    10,568
    
  
  

 

F -12-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

9. Net Interest Payable and Similar Charges

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Interest receivable

Third parties

   (2,352 )   (219 )   (819 )
    

 

 

Interest payable

Bank loans and overdrafts

   92     94     31  

Other loans

   20,439     16,363     15,276  

Premia on redemption of loans, Senior Notes and Senior Subordinated Notes

   1,950     —       —    
    

 

 

     22,481     16,457     15,307  
    

 

 

Similar charges

                  

Gain on retranslation of Senior Notes

   (9,398 )   (8,686 )   (7,747 )

Gain on redemption of Senior Notes

   (1,280 )   —       —    

Revaluation and write off of currency options

   9,507     4,055     1,177  

Amortisation of finance charges

   1,545     456     456  

Unwinding of discount included in provisions

   29     31     52  
    

 

 

     403     (4,144 )   (6,062 )
    

 

 

Net interest payable and similar charges

   20,532     12,094     8,426  
    

 

 

 

10. Taxation

 

Analysis of tax charge/(credit) in the period:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Current tax:

                

Current tax on income for the period

   608     1,774     2,816

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

   (71 )   (669 )   14
    

 

 
     537     1,105     2,830
    

 

 

Deferred tax:

                

Origination and reversal of timing differences

   (874 )   970     1,928

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

   476     (54 )   —  
    

 

 
     (398 )   916     1,928
    

 

 

Total tax on profit on ordinary activities

   139     2,021     4,758
    

 

 

 

Factors affecting current tax charge:

 

The difference between the UK statutory rate and the actual current tax rate is reconciled as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     %     %     %  

UK statutory rate

   30.0     30.0     30.0  

Disallowed expenses and non-taxable income

   (60.1 )   (3.8 )   6.5  

Adjustments in respect of previous periods

   (8.1 )   (6.4 )   0.1  

Deferred tax recognised

   99.0     (9.2 )   (14.8 )
    

 

 

Total current tax charge

   60.8     10.6     21.8  
    

 

 

 

F -13-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

10. Taxation (continued)

 

A reconciliation of the UK statutory rate of corporation tax applicable for the Group to the total tax rate is as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


     %     %     %

UK statutory rate

   30.0     30.0     30.0

Non-tax deductible depreciation of fixed assets

   74.4     6.8     6.3

Permanent differences

   11.7     1.9     0.2

Non-taxable profit in respect of disposals

   (146.1 )   (12.5 )   —  

Prior year adjustments

   45.8     (6.9 )   0.1
    

 

 

Effective tax rate

   15.8     19.3     36.6
    

 

 

 

Factors that may affect future tax charges:

 

There are estimated capital losses of £10,000,000 that may be available against future gains. In the event that the Group makes profits on capital disposals, an unrecognised deferred tax asset of approximately £3,000,000 would be available to offset against such tax liabilities.

 

The tax on profit on sale of fixed assets is nil (2003: nil; 2002: nil).

 

The movements in the provision for deferred taxation during the period are as follows:

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

At the beginning of the period

   (976 )   (60 )

Balance from acquired company

   —       125  

Charge for the period

   916     1,928  
    

 

At the end of the period

   (60 )   1,993  
    

 

 

The deferred tax (asset)/liability comprises:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

(Decelerated)/accelerated capital allowances

   (964 )   42     1,554

Other timing differences

   (12 )   (102 )   439
    

 

 

Total (asset included in debtors)/creditor included in provisions

   (976 )   (60 )   1,993
    

 

 

 

11. Dividends

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

        November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Ordinary dividends to parent company - paid

   22,450    —      —  
    
  
  

 

 

F -14-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

12. Intangible Fixed Assets

 

Goodwill    (£ thousands)

 

Cost:

      

At December 1, 2002

   7,325  

Additions

   1,245  

Disposals

   (37 )
    

At November 30, 2003

   8,533  

Additions

   8,935  

Disposals

   (163 )
    

At November 27, 2004

   17,305  
    

Amortisation:

      

At December 1, 2002

   607  

Provided during the year

   398  

Disposals

   (5 )
    

At November 30, 2003

   1,000  

Provided during the year

   553  

Disposals

   (25 )
    

At November 27, 2004

   1,528  
    

Net book value:

      

At November 30, 2003

   7,533  
    

At November 27, 2004

   15,777  
    

 

Goodwill arising on acquisitions is being amortised evenly over the directors’ estimate of the useful economic life of 20 years.

 

13. Tangible Fixed Assets

 

     Land and
Buildings


   

Plant and

machinery


    Total

 
     (£ thousands)  

Cost

                  

At December 1, 2002

   21,977     60,330     82,307  

Additions

   2,101     6,663     8,764  

Acquisitions

   975     176     1,151  

Disposals

   (2,998 )   (1,866 )   (4,864 )
    

 

 

At November 30, 2003

   22,055     65,303     87,358  

Additions

   2,500     6,718     9,218  

Acquisitions

   1,179     1,032     2,211  

Disposals

   (3,672 )   (2,877 )   (6,549 )
    

 

 

At November 27, 2004

   22,062     70,176     92,238  
    

 

 

Depreciation

                  

At December 1, 2002

   4,426     27,055     31,481  

Charge for the period

   2,368     7,768     10,136  

Disposals

   (689 )   (1,298 )   (1,987 )
    

 

 

At November 30, 2003

   6,105     33,525     39,630  

Charge for the period

   2,566     7,749     10,315  

Disposals

   (1,120 )   (2,334 )   (3,454 )
    

 

 

At November 27, 2004

   7,551     38,940     46,491  
    

 

 

Net book value

                  

At November 30, 2003

   15,950     31,778     47,728  
    

 

 

At November 27, 2004

   14,511     31,236     45,747  
    

 

 

 

F -15-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

13. Tangible Fixed Assets (continued)

 

The net book value of land and buildings comprises:

 

     Freehold

  

Long

Leasehold


   Short
Leasehold


   Total

     (£ thousands)

At November 30, 2003

   6,518    1,096    8,336    15,950
    
  
  
  

At November 27, 2004

   5,464    1,262    7,785    14,511
    
  
  
  

 

14. Acquisitions and Disposals

 

On August 21, 2004, a subsidiary of the Company acquired the entire share capital of Dillons Stores Limited from a subsidiary of Tesco PLC, comprising 181 newsagent stores. The Group also made a number of small acquisitions in Fiscal 2002, Fiscal 2003 and Fiscal 2004 that were not considered material to the Group. An analysis of these acquisitions is shown below:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


   52 weeks ended

 
        November 29,
2003


   November 27, 2004

 
               Dillons

    Other

   Total

 
     (£ thousands)  

Net assets at the date of acquisition Tangible fixed assets

   194    1,151    868     1,343    2,211  

Inventories

   143    280    4,469     211    4,680  

Debtors

   —      —      1,820     —      1,820  

Creditors

   —      —      (1,049 )   —      (1,049 )

Cash

   —      —      10,798     —      10,798  
    
  
  

 
  

     337    1,431    16,906     1,554    18,460  

Goodwill arising on acquisition

   2,183    1,245    7,139     1,796    8,935  
    
  
  

 
  

     2,520    2,676    24,045     3,350    27,395  
    
  
  

 
  

Discharged by:

                           

Cash paid

   2,520    2,676    17,293     3,350    20,643  

Cost of acquisition

   —      —      405     —      405  

Deferred consideration

   —      —      6,347     —      6,347  
    
  
  

 
  

     2,520    2,676    24,045     3,350    27,395  
    
  
  

 
  

 

The difference between the fair value of assets acquired and book value is not considered to be significant.

 

The deferred consideration comprises £1,952,950, £1,952,950 and £2,441,150 due February 21, 2005, August 21, 2005 and February 21, 2006 respectively (6, 12 and 18 months after acquisition).

 

Dillons Stores Limited made a profit on ordinary activities after tax of £819,000 for the year ended February 28, 2004, and the summarised profit and loss account for the period from March 1, 2004 to the date of acquisition is as follows:

 

    

Period ended

August 21, 2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Turnover

   31,248  
    

Operating profit and profit before tax

   1,047  

Tax

   (314 )
    

Profit after tax

   733  
    

 

There were no recognised gains and losses in the period ended August 21, 2004 other than the profit after tax of £733,000.

 

For the period August 22, 2004 to November 27, 2004, Dillons Stores limited contributed £316,000 to the Group’s operating cash flows.

 

The costs incurred in integrating Dillons Stores Limited amounted to £258,000 and have been shown as an Operating Exceptional Item.

 

F -16-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

14. Acquisitions and Disposals (continued)

 

During Fiscal 2004, the Group received £1,250,000 of the deferred consideration in respect of the disposal of the Mayfair business in Fiscal 2001. Additional deferred consideration of £1,250,000 in relation to the disposal of the Mayfair business is included in other debtors (note 16).

 

15. Inventories

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Goods for resale

   34,115    38,880
    
  

 

The directors consider that the replacement value of inventories does not materially differ from the book value shown above.

 

16. Debtors

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Trade debtors

   3,169    3,010

Other debtors

   15,896    16,492

Pension asset

   5,612    8,393

Deferred taxation

   60    —  

Pre-payments

   3,107    3,973
    
  
     27,844    31,868
    
  

Due within one year

   20,922    23,475

Other debtors due after more than one year

   6,922    8,393
    
  
     27,844    31,868
    
  

 

Trade debtors at November 27, 2004 are shown net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts of £387,000 (2003: £175,000).

 

17. Other Current Assets

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Currency options

   177    —  
    
  

 

18. Creditors: Amounts Falling Due Within One Year

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Other liabilities:

         

Amount owed to parent undertaking

   269    344

Group relief payable

   33    9

Corporation tax

   2,756    3,344

Taxation and social security

   2,909    1,671

Other creditors

   3,022    12,175

Accruals

   8,037    8,978
    
  
     17,026    26,521
    
  

 

F -17-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

19. Loans

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Bank and other loans repayable otherwise than by instalments

            

$145.3 million 11% Senior Notes due May 15, 2008

   84,963     77,216  

£53.3 million 12.25% Senior Subordinated Notes due May 15, 2008

   53,300     53,300  
    

 

     138,263     130,516  

Less: unamortised issue costs

   (2,023 )   (1,567 )
    

 

Total borrowings

   136,240     128,949  
    

 

 

The $145,297,000 Senior Notes due in May 2008 have been translated at November 27, 2004 at the rate of $1.8817 = £1 (2003: $1.7101). Interest on the Senior and Senior Subordinated Notes is payable half-yearly. These Notes are redeemable in whole or in part at the option of the Company. They are unsecured and rank pari passu with any existing and future senior unsecured indebtedness of the Company and senior to all existing and future subordinated debt of the Company but are subordinate to all liabilities in the subsidiaries of the Company.

 

Maturity of Debt

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Amounts falling due:

            

In more than two years but not more than five years

   138,263     130,516  

Less: unamortised issue costs

   (2,023 )   (1,567 )
    

 

Total borrowings

   136,240     128,949  
    

 

 

20. Financial Risk Management

 

Derivatives and other financial instruments

 

The Group’s principal financial instruments, other than derivatives, comprise loans, cash and short-term deposits. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to raise finance for the Group’s operations. The Group has various other financial instruments, such as trade debtors and trade creditors, that arise directly from its operations.

 

The Group also enters into derivative transactions (principally currency options and forward currency contracts). The purpose is to manage the currency risks arising from the Group’s operations and its sources of finance.

 

It is, and has been throughout the period under review, the Group’s policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken.

 

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are liquidity risk and foreign currency risk. The board reviews and agrees policies for managing each of these risks and they are summarised below.

 

The disclosures below include short-term debtors and creditors and exclude un-amortised finance costs.

 

Interest rate risk

 

All financial liabilities on which interest is paid are at fixed rates, with no interest rate swaps or caps during the period.

 

F -18-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

20. Financial Risk Management (continued)

 

Interest rate risk profile of financial liabilities

 

The interest rate profile of the financial liabilities of the Group was as follows:

 

     Fixed rate
financial
liabilities


   Floating
rate
financial
liabilities


   Financial
liabilities on
which no
interest is
paid


   Total

     (£ thousands)

As at November 29, 2003

                   

Sterling

   53,300    —      82,275    135,575

US dollar

   84,963    —      —      84,963
    
  
  
  
     138,263    —      82,275    220,538
    
  
  
  

As at November 27, 2004

                   

Sterling

   53,300    —      84,402    137,702

US dollar

   77,216    —      —      77,216
    
  
  
  
     130,516    —      84,402    214,918
    
  
  
  

 

     Fixed rate financial liabilities

   Financial
liabilities on
which no interest
is paid


    

Weighted

average
interest

rate

%


   Weighted average
period for which
rate is fixed
(years)


   Weighted
average period
until maturity
(years)


As at November 29, 2003

              

Sterling

   12.25    4.50    0.38

US dollar

   11.00    4.50    —  
    
  
  
     11.45    4.50    0.38
    
  
  

As at November 27, 2004

              

Sterling

   12.25    3.50    0.24

US dollar

   11.00    3.50    —  
    
  
  
     11.45    3.50    0.24
    
  
  

 

Interest rate risk profile of financial assets

 

The interest rate profile of the financial assets of the Group was as follows:

 

     Fixed
rate
financial
assets


   Floating
rate
financial
assets


   Financial
assets on
which no
interest
is earned


   Total

     (£ thousands)

As at November 29, 2003

                   

Sterling

   —      14,105    30,762    44,867
    
  
  
  

As at November 27, 2004

                   

Sterling

   —      6,097    28,642    34,739
    
  
  
  

 

Floating rate financial assets comprise cash deposits on money market deposit at call that earn interest at commercial rates. The weighted average period for financial assets on which no interest is earned is 0.2 years (2003: 0.3 years).

 

F -19-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

20. Financial Risk Management (continued)

 

Liquidity risk

 

The Group’s objective is to maintain a balance between continuity of funding and flexibility through the use of overdrafts, loans and finance leases.

 

Short-term flexibility has been achieved through borrowing facilities in the operating subsidiaries. Under this arrangement, the Company’s subsidiaries had an undrawn Revolving Credit Facility of £20,000,000 available at November 27, 2004 of which £5,000,000 was allocated as an overdraft facility. These facilities are renewable periodically.

 

Foreign currency risk

 

As a result of US dollar denominated borrowings of $145,297,000 and interest payments thereon, the Group’s balance sheet and profit and loss account can be significantly affected by movements in the US dollar/sterling exchange rates. The Group has partially mitigated the effect of this currency exposure by purchasing options to buy US dollars. In managing its currency exposures, the group’s objectives are to maintain a low cost of borrowing and to retain some potential for currency-related appreciation while hedging against currency depreciation.

 

From May 1998, the Group had acquired a series of options, exercisable on May 13, 2003, to purchase US dollars at a rate between $1.55 = £1.00 and $1.60 = £1.00. The level of US borrowings covered by the options was $150,000,000. These options were not exercised and therefore lapsed during the period.

 

On May 14, 2003, the Group acquired an option, exercisable on November 13, 2003, to purchase US dollars at the rate of $1.55 = £1.00 which covered US borrowings of $125,000,000. At the expiration of this option, the Group acquired a replacement option, exercisable on March 15, 2004, to purchase US dollars at the rate of $1.59 = £1.00 which also covered US borrowings of $125,000,000. Subsequent options to purchase $145,000,000 were acquired as follows:

 

    In March 2004 expiring July 2004 at the rate of $1.7025 = £1

 

    In July 2004 expiring January 2005 at the rate of $1.6930 = £1

 

These options were not exercised and therefore lapsed at their expiry dates.

 

Subsequent to the year end, in January 2005, an option was acquired to purchase $145 million at the rate of $1.7380 = £1.00. This option will expire July 4, 2005.

 

The Group had also entered into forward foreign currency contracts for the purchase, at rates varying from $1.5891 = £1.00 to $1.6177 = £1.00, of US dollar amounts equal to the total of the first ten half-yearly interest payments on the senior notes, for settlement on each interest payment date between November 1998 and May 2003. These forward foreign currency contracts were accounted for as hedges in accordance with the Group’s accounting policy and expired in May 2003. In October and November 2003 further forward currency contracts at rates of $1.6459 = £1.00 and $1.67 = £1.00 were taken out and used for the November 2003 interest payment on the senior notes. There were no outstanding contracts at the period end and therefore no unrecognised gains or losses.

 

The Group could still be exposed to material currency translation fluctuation in relation to the uncovered US borrowings of $297,000, the half yearly interest payments on the senior notes and, in any event, upon the expiration of the remaining option on July 4, 2005. The Group will continue to review its hedging arrangements and may amend them if it can do so on commercially attractive terms.

 

F -20-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

20. Financial Risk Management (continued)

 

Maturity of financial liabilities

 

The maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities was as follows:

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

In one year or less, or on demand

   79,980    79,778

In more than one year but not more than two

   1,086    3,471

In more than two years, but no more than three

   101    96

In more than three years, but no more than four

   101    130,612

In more than four years, but not more than five

   138,363    96

In more than five years

   907    865
    
  
     220,538    214,918
    
  

 

Borrowing facilities

 

The Group has certain borrowing facilities available to it for general working capital requirements, none of which were drawn at November 27, 2004 (2003 - nil). Expiration of these facilities is as follows:

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

In one year or less

   20,000    20,000
    
  

 

Fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities

 

Set out below is a comparison by category of book values and fair values of all the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities:

 

     At November 29, 2003

    At November 27, 2004

 
     Book Value

    Fair Value

    Book value

    Fair value

 
     (£ thousands)  

Primary financial instruments

                        

Financial liabilities

                        

Short-term creditors

   (79,419 )   (79,419 )   (79,243 )   (79,243 )

Long-term borrowings

   (138,263 )   (141,863 )   (130,516 )   (136,830 )

Long-term creditors

   (697 )   (697 )   (3,100 )   (3,100 )

Provisions

   (2,159 )   (2,159 )   (2,059 )   (2,059 )
    

 

 

 

     (220,538 )   (224,138 )   (214,918 )   (221,232 )
    

 

 

 

Financial assets

                        

Currency Options

   177     177     —       —    

Short-term debtors

   17,815     17,815     19,502     19,502  

Long-term debtors

   1,250     1,250     —       —    

Cash and short-term deposits

   25,625     25,625     15,237     15,237  
    

 

 

 

     44,867     44,867     34,739     34,739  
    

 

 

 

 

Currency exposure

 

There were no derivative financial instruments held to hedge currency exposure (2003: none).

 

Market values have been used to determine the fair value of the forward foreign currency contracts, the $145,297,000 11% Senior Notes, the £53,300,000 12.25% Senior Subordinated Notes and the currency options. For all other instruments, any differences between fair value and book value are not considered to be material.

 

Hedges

 

There were no unrecognised gains or losses on financial instruments used for hedging as at November 27, 2004 (2003: nil, 2002: £199,000).

 

F -21-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

21. Provisions for Liabilities and Charges

 

 

     Deferred
tax


    Dilapidations

   

Onerous

Contracts


    Other

    Total

 
     (£ thousands)  

At November 24, 2001

   —       1,033     2,127     4     3,164  

Charged/(released) during the period

   —       3     (16 )   —       (13 )

Unwinding of discount included in provisions

   —       9     20     —       29  

Utilised during the period

   —       (248 )   (217 )   (4 )   (469 )
    

 

 

 

 

At November 30, 2002

   —       797     1,914     —       2,711  

Charged/(released) during the period

   —       236     (214 )   —       22  

Unwinding of discount included in provisions

   —       6     25     —       31  

Utilised during the period

   —       (327 )   (278 )   —       (605 )
    

 

 

 

 

At November 29, 2003

   —       712     1,447     —       2,159  

Acquired during the period

   125     —       —       —       125  

Charged during the period

   1,928     193     210     —       2,331  

Unwinding of discount included in provisions

   —       22     30     —       52  

Utilised during the period

   (60 )   (294 )   (261 )   —       (615 )
    

 

 

 

 

At November 27, 2004

   1,993     633     1,426     —       4,052  
    

 

 

 

 

 

Onerous contracts

 

A provision is recognised for the rent due less estimated rent receivable until the anticipated disposal of a vacant property. In addition, provision has been made for excess rent over market rent on leasehold properties as part of fair value assessments made on acquisition. It is expected that most of these costs will be incurred during the next five years.

 

Dilapidations

 

A provision is recognised for the expected cost of dilapidation that has occurred in respect of leasehold properties. It is expected that most of these costs will be incurred during the next five years.

 

22. Other Financial Commitments

 

     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Capital commitments

         

Contracted but not provided for

   821    179
    
  

Annual commitments under non-cancellable operating leases

         

Land and buildings leases expiring:

         

Within one year

   952    961

Between two and five years

   7,481    9,005

After more than five years

   14,768    14,925
    
  
     23,201    24,891

Other leases expiring:

         

Between two and five years

   116    116
    
  
     23,317    25,007
    
  

 

The aggregate payments, for which there are commitments under operating leases fall due as follows:

 

     November 27, 2004

     Land and
Buildings


   Other

     (£ thousands)

Within one year

   24,891    116

Between one and two years

   22,771    58

Between two and three years

   20,670    —  

Between three and four years

   18,724    —  

Between four and five years

   16,202    —  

After five years

   88,332    —  
    
  
     191,590    174
    
  

 

F -22-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

23. Cash Flow Statements

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt

                  

Increase/(decrease) in cash in the period

   1,231     2,953     (2,380 )

(Decrease)/increase in short-term deposits

   (83,394 )   1,262     (8,008 )

Repayment of loans

   51,773     —       —    

Repayment of lease financing

   3     —       —    
    

 

 

Change in net debt resulting from cash flows

   (30,387 )   4,215     (10,388 )

Change in net debt resulting from exchange

movement

   10,678     8,686     7,747  

Movement in un-amortised finance costs

   (1,545 )   (456 )   (456 )
    

 

 

Movement in net debt in the period

   (21,254 )   12,445     (3,097 )

Net debt at the beginning of the period

   (101,806 )   (123,060 )   (110,615 )
    

 

 

Net debt at the end of the period

   (123,060 )   (110,615 )   (113,712 )
    

 

 

Comprising:

                  

Cash at bank and in hand

   21,410     25,625     15,237  

Loans due after one year based on original book valuation

   (137,111 )   (137,567 )   (138,023 )

Cumulative exchange differences arising on retranslation of Senior Notes

   (7,359 )   1,327     9,074  
    

 

 

     (123,060 )   (110,615 )   (113,712 )
    

 

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Reconciliation of operating profit to net cash inflow from operating activities

                  

Operating profit

   17,508     18,651     15,697  

Depreciation and amortisation charge

   10,730     10,534     10,868  

Decrease in provisions

   (482 )   (583 )   (152 )

Decrease/(increase) in inventories

   555     543     (85 )

Decrease/(increase) in debtors

   1,149     (7,621 )   (3,514 )

(Decrease)/increase in creditors

   (9,843 )   3,446     (5,832 )
    

 

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   19,617     24,970     16,982  
    

 

 

Analysis of changes in loan financing during the period

                  

At the beginning of the period

   205,376     144,470     136,240  

Redemption of Senior and Senior Subordinated Notes

   (21,486 )   —       —    

Repayment of loans

   (30,287 )   —       —    

Movement in exchange differences

   (10,678 )   (8,686 )   (7,747 )

Movement in un-amortised finance costs

   1,545     456     456  
    

 

 

At the end of the period

   144,470     136,240     128,949  
    

 

 

Analysis of changes in finance leases during the period

                  

At the beginning of the period

   3     —       —    

Capital element of finance lease rental payments

   (3 )   —       —    
    

 

 

At the end of the period

   —       —       —    
    

 

 

 

24. Pension Commitments

 

The Group continues to account for pensions in accordance with SSAP 24.

 

The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes in the United Kingdom, the TM Group Pension Scheme and the TM Pension Plan. Full actuarial valuations of the schemes are carried out in accordance with legislative requirements. The last full valuations of the schemes were carried out at March 31, 2002 (TM Group Pension Scheme) and April 30, 2002 (TM Pension Plan).

 

F -23-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

24. Pension Commitments (continued)

 

The contributions to the schemes during the year were determined with the advice of independent qualified actuaries on the basis of triennial valuations using the projected unit method. The principal assumptions made for the last full SSAP 24 valuations for the purpose of determining pension costs are:

 

     TM Group
Pension Scheme


 

TM Pension

Plan


Rate of return on investments

        

Before retirement

   7.7%   7.7%

In retirement

   7.7%   7.7%

Rate of salary increases

   3.8%   3.7%

Rate of pension increases

   2.7%   2.6%

Date of latest valuation

   March 31, 2002   April 30, 2002

Market value of schemes’ assets at latest valuation

   £54.9m   £24.0m

 

Using the above assumptions, the actuarial value of the schemes’ assets at the last full valuation date represented the following percentages of the benefits for each scheme that had accrued to the members based on service to that date allowing for assumed future salary increases:

 

     TM Group Pension
Scheme


   TM Pension
Plan


     %    %

Percentage of benefits

   108    95

 

Additional contributions will continue to be made in order to reduce the deficiency in the TM Pension Plan, following the last full valuation in April 2002.

 

Movements in the Group pension asset throughout the period may be summarised as follows:

 

     52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     £000     £000  

Balance at the beginning of the period

   1,753     5,612  

Funding

   4,500     3,078  

Charged during the period

   (641 )   (297 )
    

 

Balance at the end of the period

   5,612     8,393  
    

 

 

The agreed contribution level for future years, following the latest actuarial valuation of the schemes, is £3,000,000 increasing annually by price inflation. At the next actuarial valuation, the contribution level will be reassessed.

 

Both schemes are closed to new entrants.

 

Under the transitional rules of FRS 17 – Retirement Benefits – certain additional disclosures are required in the financial statements which are set out below. The disclosures are based upon the last full valuations of the schemes which were carried out at March 31, 2002 (TM Group Pension Scheme) and April 30, 2002 (TM Pension Plan) and have been updated to November 27, 2004 by qualified independent actuaries, using revised assumptions that are consistent with the requirements of FRS 17.

 

F -24-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

24. Pension Commitments (continued)

 

Main financial assumptions:

 

     November 30, 2002

   November 29, 2003

   November 27, 2004

     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


   TM
Pension
Plan


   TM Group
Pension
Scheme


   TM
Pension
Plan


   TM Group
Pension
Scheme


   TM
Pension
Plan


     %pa    %pa    %pa    %pa    %pa    %pa

Inflation

   2.3    2.3    2.8    2.8    2.8    2.8

Rate of general long-term increase in salaries

   3.3    3.3    3.8    3.8    3.8    3.8

Rate of increase to pensions in payment

                             

Post April 5, 1997

   2.3    2.3    2.8    2.7    2.7    2.7

Pre April 6, 1997

   1.2    2.3    0.0    2.7    0.0    2.7

Discount rate of scheme liabilities

   5.7    5.7    5.6    5.6    5.2    5.2

 

Expected return on assets:

 

     Long Term rate of return
expected at


  

Value at

November 29, 2003


   

Value at

November 27, 2004


 
     November 29,
2003


   November 27,
2004


   TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


 
     (% pa)    (£ millions)  

Equities

   8.0    7.5    40.6     16.4     43.8     18.1  

Property

   7.0    6.5    2.7     —       2.4     —    

Government bonds

   5.0    4.5    1.7     6.8     2.9     7.6  

Corporate bonds

   5.5    5.0    2.3     —       1.2     —    

Other

   4.5    4.0    0.5     —       1.5     —    
              

 

 

 

Total market value of assets

             47.8     23.2     51.8     25.7  

Present value of scheme liabilities

             (58.5 )   (31.5 )   (63.9 )   (34.4 )
              

 

 

 

Deficit in scheme

             (10.7 )   (8.3 )   (12.1 )   (8.7 )

Related deferred tax asset

             3.2     2.5     3.6     2.6  
              

 

 

 

Net pension liability

             (7.5 )   (5.8 )   (8.5 )   (6.1 )
              

 

 

 

 

The following amounts would have been charged/(credited) to operating profit as follows:

 

    

53 weeks ended

November 30, 2002


   52 weeks ended

        November 29, 2003

   November 27, 2004

     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


   TM
Pension
Plan


   TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


   TM Group
Pension
Scheme


   TM
Pension
Plan


     (£ millions)

Current service cost

   1.0    0.5    0.8     0.4    0.8    0.4

Settlement profit

   —      —      (1.8 )   —      —      —  
    
  
  

 
  
  

Total operating charge/Income)

   1.0    0.5    (1.0 )   0.4    0.8    0.4
    
  
  

 
  
  

 

The following amounts would have been credited/(charged) to other finance income as follows:

 

    

53 weeks ended

November 30, 2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29, 2003

    November 27, 2004

 
     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


 
     (£ millions)  

Total return on pension scheme assets

   4.3     1.6     3.6     1.4     3.6     1.6  

Interest on pension scheme liabilities

   (4.0 )   (1.6 )   (3.4 )   (1.6 )   (3.2 )   (1.7 )
    

 

 

 

 

 

Total other finance income/(charge)

   0.3     —       0.2     (0.2 )   0.4     (0.1 )
    

 

 

 

 

 

 

F -25-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

24. Pension Commitments (continued)

 

The following amounts would have been recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses as follows:

 

     53 weeks ended
November 30, 2002


    52 weeks ended
November 29, 2003


    52 weeks ended
November 27, 2004


 
     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


 
     (£ millions)  

Actual return less expected return on pension scheme assets

   (12.0 )   (4.3 )   (0.1 )   0.6     1.4     1.0  

Experience gains and losses arising on the present value of scheme liabilities

   3.7     1.1     (0.4 )   0.3     (0.2 )   (0.2 )

Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities

   5.8     0.6     (2.8 )   (2.1 )   (3.8 )   (2.2 )
    

 

 

 

 

 

Actuarial loss recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses

   (2.5 )   (2.6 )   (3.3 )   (1.2 )   (2.6 )   (1.4 )
    

 

 

 

 

 

 

Analysis of movement in deficit during the period:

 

     52 weeks ended
November 29, 2003


   

52 weeks ended

November 27, 2004


 
     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


 
     (£ millions)  

Opening balance

   (11.6 )   (8.0 )   (10.7 )   (8.3 )

Total operating income/(charge)

   1.0     (0.4 )   (0.8 )   (0.4 )

Total other finance income/(charge)

   0.2     (0.2 )   0.4     (0.1 )

Actuarial loss

   (3.3 )   (1.2 )   (2.6 )   (1.4 )

Contributions

   3.0     1.5     1.6     1.5  
    

 

 

 

Closing balance

   (10.7 )   (8.3 )   (12.1 )   (8.7 )
    

 

 

 

 

History of experience gains and losses:

 

     53 weeks ended
November 30, 2002


    52 weeks ended
November 29, 2003


   

52 weeks ended

November 27, 2004


 
     TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


    TM Group
Pension
Scheme


    TM
Pension
Plan


 

Difference between expected and actual return on pension scheme assets

                                    

Amount (£ millions)

   (12.0 )   (4.3 )   (0.1 )   0.6     1.4     1.0  

Percentage of scheme assets

   23.6 %   20.6 %   0.2 %   2.6 %   2.8 %   4.1 %

Experience gains and losses arising on the present value of scheme liabilities

                                    

Amount (£ millions)

   3.7     1.1     (0.4 )   0.3     (0.2 )   (0.2 )

Percentage of the present value of scheme liabilities

   5.9 %   3.8 %   0.7 %   1.0 %   0.2 %   0.4 %

Total actuarial loss recognised in statement of total recognised gains and losses

                                    

Amount (£ millions)

   (2.5 )   (2.6 )   (3.3 )   (1.2 )   (2.6 )   (1.4 )

Percentage of the present value of scheme liabilities

   4.0 %   9.0 %   5.7 %   3.8 %   4.1 %   4.0 %

 

F -26-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

24. Pension Commitments (continued)

 

Reconciliation of net liabilities and reserves under FRS 17:

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Net liabilities as stated in balance sheet

   (81,191 )   (72,859 )

SSAP 24 balance after deferred taxation

   (3,928 )   (5,875 )

FRS 17 balance after deferred taxation

   (13,300 )   (14,600 )
    

 

Net liabilities as adjusted for FRS 17

   (98,419 )   (93,334 )
    

 

Profit and loss reserve as stated in balance sheet

   (42,038 )   (33,706 )

SSAP 24 balance after deferred taxation

   (3,928 )   (5,875 )

FRS 17 balance after deferred taxation

   (13,300 )   (14,600 )
    

 

Profit and loss reserve as adjusted for FRS 17

   (59,266 )   (54,181 )
    

 

 

25. Related Party Transactions

 

There were no related party transactions during Fiscal 2004 (Fiscal 2003: none). In Fiscal 2002 the holding company, Thistledove Limited, redeemed the whole of the Unsecured 7% Loan Notes 2008. J Lancaster and A R Cox, directors of TM Group Holding Plc, received £148,896 and £74,449 respectively during that period in respect of this transaction.

 

26. Contingent Liabilities

 

The Group did not have any material contingent liabilities at November 27, 2004. Certain subsidiaries of the Company have assigned UK property leases in the normal course of business. Should the assignees fail to fulfil any obligations in respect of these leases, members of the Group may be liable for those defaults. The number of such claims arising to date has been small, and the liability, which is charged to the profit and loss as it arises, has not been material.

 

27. Companies Act 1985

 

These financial statements do not comprise the Group’s “statutory accounts” within the meaning of section 240 of the Companies Act 1985 of Great Britain. Statutory accounts for the 53 weeks ended November 30, 2002, and 52 weeks ended November 29, 2003 have been, and statutory accounts for the 52 weeks ended November 27, 2004 will be, delivered to the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales. The auditors’ reports on such accounts were unqualified.

 

28. New Accounting Standards

 

FRS 17, ‘Retirement Benefits’, issued in November 2000, is fully effective for accounting periods starting on or after January 1, 2005. Certain of the disclosure requirements are, however, effective for periods prior to the January 2005 deadline and those required are given in Note 24 to the Financial Statements. The standard requires that financial statements reflect at fair values the assets and liabilities arising from an employer’s retirement benefit obligations and related funding. The operating costs of providing retirement benefits are recognised in the period in which they are earned together with any related finance costs and changes in the value of the related assets and liabilities. Had FRS 17 been implemented at November 27, 2004 the Group would have reported a pension liability net of deferred taxation of £14.6 million, which compares with the pension asset net of deferred taxation of £5.9 million recorded in the Financial Statements under the existing rules. The impact of FRS 17 on profit and loss reserves would have been to reduce those reserves by £20.5 million.

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles

 

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom (“UK GAAP”) which differ from US generally accepted accounting principles (“US GAAP”). The significant differences as they apply to the Group are described below.

 

F -27-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Pension costs

 

Under UK GAAP, the Group provides for the cost of retirement benefits based upon consistent percentages of employees’ pensionable pay as recommended by independent qualified actuaries. US GAAP require that projected benefit obligation (pension liability) be matched against the fair value of the plan’s assets and be adjusted to reflect any unrecognised obligation or asset in determining the pension cost or credit for the year. In addition, under US GAAP where the value of plan assets is below the value of the liabilities valued on an accumulated benefit obligation basis, the deficit on this basis would be recognised immediately through other comprehensive income or as an intangible asset, to the extent of any unrecognised prior service cost.

 

Deferred debt issue costs

 

Under UK GAAP, costs of issuing debt finance are presented as a deduction from the carrying amount of debt finance to which they relate. Under US GAAP these deferred issue costs would be included in non-current assets.

 

Purchase accounting

 

Under US GAAP, the restructuring provisions, primarily consisting of redundancy and store closure costs, made at the time of the MBO would not have been permitted as they did not meet the criteria for recognition set forth in EITF 95-3. These amounts would have been expensed as incurred. The goodwill arising under US GAAP on the MBO would have been reduced accordingly.

 

In addition, under US GAAP the goodwill arising would have been reduced to the extent the asset arising with respect to pension costs at the date of acquisition under US GAAP was higher than that arising under UK GAAP.

 

Goodwill

 

Under UK GAAP, goodwill arising on acquisitions prior to November 28, 1998 was set off directly against reserves. Goodwill arising on acquisitions since November 28, 1998 is capitalised, classified as an asset on the balance sheet and amortised on a straight-line basis over its useful economic life up to a presumed maximum of 20 years. It is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full financial year following the acquisition and in other periods if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. If a subsidiary or business is subsequently sold or closed, any goodwill arising on acquisition that was written off directly to reserves or that has not been amortised through the profit and loss account is reviewed for impairment and if such goodwill is not considered to be attached to the continuing business it is taken into account in determining the profit or loss on sale or closure.

 

Under US GAAP, goodwill purchased prior to 2002 would have been capitalised and amortised over its estimated useful life not exceeding 40 years. The Group has adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards 142 (“SFAS 142”) Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, which requires that goodwill is not amortised, but is tested at least annually for impairment. No impairment has resulted from the test carried out in respect of the period ended November 27, 2004.

 

Under US GAAP, the benefit of acquired tax losses not previously recognised at the date of acquisition is credited as an adjustment to goodwill rather than taken to the profit and loss account as a reduction of the tax charge.

 

Provisions

 

Under UK GAAP, provisions are discounted where the effect of the time value of money is material. Under US GAAP a provision should only be discounted where the aggregate amount of the liability and the timing of future cash payments are fixed or reliably determinable. On this basis, the discounting of provisions relating to dilapidations is not permitted under US GAAP.

 

F -28-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Accounting for derivative instruments and hedging activities

 

The Group adopted the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities”, as amended from November 26, 2000. This Statement requires that all derivatives be recorded on the balance sheet as either an asset or liability measured at fair value. Gains or losses resulting from changes in the fair value of these derivatives would be accounted for based on the use of the derivative and whether the instrument qualified for hedge accounting, as defined under the Statement.

 

Changes in the fair value of derivatives accounted for as cash flow hedges, to the extent that they are effective as hedges, are recorded in other comprehensive income net of deferred taxes. Changes in the fair value of derivatives not qualifying as hedges are reported in net income, consistent with the treatment under UK GAAP.

 

The adoption of this Statement resulted in the Group recording, with effect from November 26, 2000, a cumulative net transition adjustment gain of £2,650,000, net of tax, in cumulative other comprehensive income and an increase in current assets to record the fair value of the forward foreign currency contracts and interest rate swaps of the same amount. The Company’s forward foreign currency contracts all expired in May 2003, so there were no current asset derivatives to record at the end of Fiscal 2003 and no changes to other comprehensive income for the period ended November 27, 2004. The currency options held by the Group are not considered to be effective hedges and do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in their market value have therefore been taken to the income statement consistent with the treatment under UK GAAP.

 

Profit on sale of businesses and fixed assets

 

Certain exceptional items are shown on the face of the profit and loss account after operating profit. These items are gains on the sale of businesses and fixed assets. Under US GAAP these items, to the extent recognised, are included within operating profit or other income. Under UK GAAP, gains arising from property sale and operating leaseback transactions are recognised in the period of the transaction. Under US GAAP, such gains are recognised in proportion to the gross rental charged over the lease term.

 

The following is a summary of the significant adjustments to profit for the year and shareholder’s funds which would be required if US GAAP were to be applied instead of UK GAAP.

 

Profit for the period

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
       November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Profit for the period as reported in the consolidated profit and loss account under UK GAAP

   744     8,444     8,240  

Adjustments

                  

Pension costs

   (1,862 )   (6,403 )   (6,195 )

Amortisation of goodwill

   (4,210 )   398     553  

Goodwill in respect of disposals

   66     —       (1,626 )

Profit on property sale and operating leaseback transactions

   (481 )   (2,494 )   (2,084 )

Dilapidations provisions

   31     8     22  

Deferred taxation on adjustments

   549     1,919     1,852  
    

 

 

Net (loss)/income for the period as adjusted to accord with US GAAP

   (5,163 )   1,872     762  
    

 

 

 

F -29-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Comprehensive income

 

Comprehensive income under US GAAP is as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


     (£ thousands)

Net (loss)/income for the period as adjusted to accord with US GAAP

   (5,163 )   1,872     762

Other comprehensive income:

                

Pension (costs)/credit net of tax at 30%

   (25,257 )   2,052     2,970

Change in fair value of derivatives net of tax at 30%

   (1,691 )   (139 )   —  
     (26,948 )   1,913     2,970
    

 

 

Comprehensive (loss)/income

   (32,111 )   3,785     3,732
    

 

 

 

Movements in other comprehensive income amounts (net of related tax) are as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
Movement in Fair Value of Derivatives    (£ thousands)  

At beginning of period

   1,830     139     —    

Losses during the period

   (1,691 )   (139 )   —    
    

 

 

At end of period

   139     —       —    
    

 

 

Minimum pension accrual

                  

At beginning of period

   —       (25,257 )   (23,205 )

Movement in the period

   (25,257 )   2,052     2,970  
    

 

 

At end of period

   (25,257 )   (23,205 )   (20,235 )
    

 

 

Total

                  

At beginning of period

   1,830     (25,118 )   (23,205 )

Movement in the period

   (26,948 )   1,913     2,970  
    

 

 

At end of period

   (25,118 )   (23,205 )   (20,235 )
    

 

 

 

F -30-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Shareholder’s funds

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Shareholder’s funds (deficit) as reported in the consolidated balance sheet under UK GAAP

   (81,191 )   (72,859 )
    

 

Adjustments

            

Intangible fixed assets — goodwill

            

Cost

   65,205     63,512  

Accumulated amortisation

   1,000     1,528  
    

 

Net

   66,205     65,040  
    

 

Other intangible asset – pensions

   120     29  

Debtors due after more than one year:

            

Deferred issue costs

   2,023     1,567  

Pension accrual

   (24,207 )   (26,069 )

Dilapidations provisions

   (61 )   (39 )

Current liabilities:

            

Deferred gains on property sale and operating leaseback transactions

   (202 )   (360 )

Deferred taxation

            

On adjustments

   7,244     7,824  

Creditors due after more than one year:

            

Deferred issue costs

   (2,023 )   (1,567 )

Deferred gains on property sale and operating leaseback transactions

   (2,773 )   (4,699 )
    

 

Shareholder’s equity (deficit) as adjusted to accord with US GAAP

   (34,865 )   (31,133 )
    

 

 

Reconciliation of movement in shareholder’s funds under US GAAP

 

    

November 27,

2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Shareholder’s equity (deficit) as adjusted to accord with US GAAP at beginning of the period

   (34,865 )

Income for the period available for equity shareholders as adjusted to accord with US GAAP

   762  

Movement in other comprehensive income during period

   2,970  
    

Shareholders equity (deficit) as adjusted to accord with US GAAP at end of the period

   (31,133 )
    

 

Consolidated statement of cash flows

 

The consolidated statements of cash flows prepared under UK GAAP present substantially the same information as those required under US GAAP but they differ, however, with regard to classification of items within the statements and as regards the definition of cash under UK GAAP and cash and cash equivalents under US GAAP.

 

Under US GAAP, cash and cash equivalents include short-term highly liquid investments but do not include bank overdrafts. Under UK GAAP, cash flows are presented separately for operating activities, returns on investments and servicing of finance, taxation and capital expenditure and financial investment, acquisitions, equity dividends and management of liquid resources and financing. US GAAP, however, require only three categories of cash flow activity to be reported: operating, investing and financing. Cash flows from taxation and returns on investments and servicing of finance shown under UK GAAP would, with the exception of dividends paid to minority shareholders, be included as operating activities under US GAAP. The payment of dividends would be included as a financing activity under US GAAP. Under US GAAP capital expenditure and financial investment and acquisitions are reported within investing activities.

 

F -31-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

The categories of cash flow activity under US GAAP can be summarised as follows:

 

    

53 weeks
ended

November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities

   (4,881 )   9,040     1,443  

Cash outflow from investing activities

   (3,056 )   (3,373 )   (10,831 )

Cash outflow from financing activities

   (74,226 )   (1,452 )   (1,000 )
    

 

 

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

   (82,163 )   4,215     (10,388 )

Cash and cash equivalents at:

                  

beginning of the period

   103,573     21,410     25,625  
    

 

 

end of the period

   21,410     25,625     15,237  
    

 

 

 

Additional information required by US GAAP in respect of the Group’s pension plans

 

The pension cost for these plans computed in accordance with the requirements of US GAAP comprises:

 

     53 weeks
ended
November 30,
2002


    52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Service cost

   1,641     1,672     1,885  

Interest cost

   4,599     5,462     5,337  

Actual return on plan assets

   (5,539 )   (4,764 )   (4,646 )

Net amortisation and deferral

   1,395     3,791     3,916  

Effect of settlement

   585     883     —    
    

 

 

Net periodic pension cost

   2,681     7,044     6,492  
    

 

 

 

The major assumptions used in computing the pension cost were:

 

     November 30,
2002


    November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 

Expected long-term rate of return on plan assets

   6.70 %   6.60 %   6.20 %

Discount rate

   5.70 %   5.60 %   5.20 %

Expected long-term rate of earnings increases

   4.25 %   4.75 %   4.00 %

 

The funding of the Group’s plans is as follows:

 

     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Accumulated benefit obligation (all vested)

   89,414     95,206  
    

 

Fair value of plan assets

   70,819     77,530  

Projected benefit obligation

   (97,475 )   (102,991 )
    

 

Plan assets in deficit of projected benefit obligation

   (26,656 )   (25,461 )

Unrecognised prior service cost

   120     29  

Unrecognised net loss

   41,696     37,154  
    

 

Prepaid pension cost

   15,160     11,722  
    

 

 

The assets of these plans principally comprise United Kingdom and other listed equities, property investments, bank deposits and UK Government index-linked stocks.

 

F -32-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Reconciliation of plans’ projected benefit obligations is as follows:

 

     52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Projected benefit obligation at beginning of period

   98,029     97,475  

Disposals

   (6,891 )   —    

Service cost

   1,672     1,885  

Interest cost

   5,462     5,337  

Plan participant contributions

   350     476  

Actuarial loss

   7,029     2,383  

Benefits paid

   (8,176 )   (4,565 )
    

 

Projected benefit obligation at end of period

   97,475     102,991  
    

 

 

Reconciliation of change in fair value of plan assets:

 

     52 weeks ended

 
     November 29,
2003


    November 27,
2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Fair value of plan assets at beginning of period

   71,674     70,819  

Disposals

   (4,254 )   —    

Actual return on plan assets

   6,725     7,746  

Group contributions

   4,500     3,054  

Plan participant contributions

   350     476  

Benefits paid

   (8,176 )   (4,565 )
    

 

Fair value of plan assets at end of period

   70,819     77,530  
    

 

 

The expected contribution to the Group’s plans for the year ending November 2005 is £3,662,000.

 

The projected benefit payments under these plans are as follows:

 

          (£ thousands)

Year ending:

  

November 2005

   4,024
    

November 2006

   4,144
    

November 2007

   4,269
    

November 2008

   4,397
    

November 2009

   4,528

Five years ending:

  

November 2014 (aggregate)

   24,764

 

Additional information required by US GAAP in respect of deferred taxation

 

The analysis of the deferred taxation asset required by US GAAP is as follows:

 

     November 29,
2004


   

November 27,

2004


 
     (£ thousands)  

Deferred taxation liabilities

            

Deficit of book value against taxation value of fixed assets

   (40 )   (1,554 )
    

 

Deferred taxation assets

            

Pension accrual

   6,699     7,282  

Taxation effect of losses carried forward

   1,979     1,979  

Taxation effect of provisions

   645     103  
    

 

     9,323     7,810  

Less: Valuation allowance

   (1,979 )   (1,979 )
    

 

Net deferred tax asset

   7,304     5,831  
    

 

Of which:

            

Current

   —       —    

Non-current

   7,304     5,831  
    

 

     7,304     5,831  
    

 

 

F -33-


Table of Contents

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (continued)

 

29. Differences between United Kingdom and United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (continued)

 

Concentrations of credit risk

 

Potential concentrations of credit risk to the Group consist principally of short-term cash investments and trade receivables.

 

At November 27, 2004 the Group did not consider there to be any significant concentration of credit risk.

 

New US accounting standards

 

FIN 46 – Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities was issued in January 2003 and subsequently revised in December 2003. It requires additional disclosures to be made in financial statements issued after January 2003 and became fully effective for accounting periods ending after March 15, 2004. FIN 46 requires certain third party entities to be consolidated by the Group if the equity investors in the entity do not have either a controlling financial interest or sufficient equity to finance its activities without additional financial support. Management have assessed the impact of this standard and concluded that no additional entities require consolidation into the Group.

 

F -34-


Table of Contents

Schedule II

 

TM GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

 

VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS

 

          Additions

   Deductions

     

Description


   Balance at
beginning
of period


  

Charged

to costs
and
expenses


   Other

     Balance
at end of
period


     (£ thousands)

53 weeks ended November 30, 2002

                         

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

   169    13    —      —       182

52 weeks ended November 29, 2003

                         

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

   182    —      —      (7 )   175

52 weeks ended November 27, 2004

                         

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

   175    152    60    —       387

 

S -1-

EX-4.2 2 dex42.htm DILLIONS SALE AND PURCHASE AGREEMENT Dillions Sale and Purchase Agreement

Exhibit 4.2

 

DILLONS

SALE AND PURCHASE AGREEMENT

 

LOGO

 

Adelaide House London Bridge London EC4R 9HA

tel +44 (0)20 7760 1000 fax +44 (0)20 7760 1111

 


DATED

  21 AUGUST   2004

 

STATUSFLOAT LIMITED

 

FORBUOYS LIMITED

 

TESCO PLC

 

AGREEMENT

 

for the sale and purchase of the

entire issued share capital of

 

DILLONS STORES LIMITED

 

LOGO

 

Adelaide House London Bridge London EC4R 9HA

tel +44 (0)20 7760 1000 fax +44 (0)20 7760 1111

 


CONTENTS

 

1   

Definitions and interpretation

   2
2   

Agreement for sale

   14
3   

Consideration

   15
4   

Net Assets Statement and adjustment to Consideration

   16
5   

Completion

   16
6   

Post-Completion undertakings

   20
7   

Properties

   22
8   

Warranties by the Seller and limitations on liability

   22
9   

Warranties by the Buyer

   24
10   

Competition

   25
11   

Pensions

   26
12   

Employment

   27
13   

Restrictive agreement

   28
14   

Guarantee

   30
15   

Set-off

   31
16   

Assignment

   32
17   

Announcements

   32
18   

Costs

   33
19   

Payments free of withholding etc.

   33
20   

Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

   33
21   

Communications

   33
22   

Invalidity

   35
23   

Whole agreement

   35
24   

Counterparts

   35
25   

Proper law

   35

 

1


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

DATED         2004

 

PARTIES

 

1    Seller    STATUSFLOAT LIMITED (company no. 4661717) whose registered office is at Tesco House, Delamare Road, Cheshunt, Hertfordshire EN8 9SL
2    Buyer    FORBUOYS LIMITED (company no. 298945) whose registered office is at TM House, Ashwells Road, Pilgrims Hatch, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST
3    Guarantor    TESCO PLC (company no. 445790) whose registered office is at Tesco House, Delamare Road, Cheshunt, Hertfordshire EN8 9SL

 

OPERATIVE PROVISIONS

 

1 Definitions and interpretation

 

1.1 In this agreement, unless the contrary intention appears, the following definitions apply:

 

After-Assessed Employee Tax    as defined in clause 12.2;
Agreed Form    a form agreed between the parties, a copy of which has been initialled for the purpose of identification by their respective solicitors;
Apportioned Price    the price attributable to each of the Unassigned Properties set out in schedule 9;
Assigned Properties    the Properties which have been assigned legally and beneficially to the Company by the Seller or any of its Associates set out in part 2 of schedule 5;
Assignment(s)    the assignment of the relevant Property to the Company, which shall include the provisions set

 

2


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

     out in paragraph 3 of part 1 of schedule 10;
Associate   

(a)     (in relation to an individual):

 

(i)      a relative, that is the individual’s issue, spouse, brother, sister or parent; or

 

(ii)     a company which is, or may be, directly or indirectly controlled (within the meaning given in s840 ICTA) by the individual or a relative of that individual, or by two or more of them; and

 

(b)     (in relation to a company) a Subsidiary Undertaking or Parent Undertaking of the Company, and any other Subsidiary Undertaking of any Parent Undertaking of the Company;

Bank Account    the bank account of the Company with HSBC Bank plc with account number 01321676 and sort code 40-17-13;
Bank Account Balance    as defined in clause 5.8.4;
Book Stock Records    the records of the Stock as at Completion;
Business    the business of a newsagent retailing tobacco products, groceries, impulse purchases, news, phonecards, greetings cards, giftwrap and any other non-food items carried on by the Company from the Properties;
Business Day    a day on which the clearing banks in the City of London are open for business;

 

3


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

Business Hours    between the hours of 09:00 and 17:00 inclusive local time;
Buyer’s Accountants    Ernst & Young LLP of 1 More London Place, London SE1 2AF;
Buyer’s Solicitors    Clifford Chance LLP of 10 Upper Bank Street, London E14 5JJ;
CA    Companies Act 1985 (as amended);
CAA    Capital Allowances Act 2001;
Call Option    the call option agreement described in schedule 9;
Cash Proceeds    as defined in clause 5.8.4;
Companies Acts    CA, the former Companies Acts (within the meaning of s735(1) CA) and the Companies Act 1989;
Company    Dillons Stores Limited (company no. 3498958), brief details of which are set out in schedule 1;
Company’s Auditors    PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP;
Completion    completion of the sale and purchase of the Shares in accordance with clause 5;
Confidential Information    means all information which is used in or otherwise relates to the Company’s business, customers or financial or other affairs including, without limitation, information relating to:
    

(a)     the marketing of goods or services including, without limitation, customer

 

4


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

    

names and lists and other details of customers, sales targets, sales statistics, market share statistics, prices, market research reports and surveys, and advertising or other promotional materials; or

    

(b)     future projects, business development or planning, commercial relationships and negotiations;

     but does not include information which is made public by, or with the consent of, the Buyer;
Consent    the licence of the landlord and any superior landlord to the Assignment of an Unassigned Property;
Consideration    the consideration payable for the Shares, as set out in clause 3.1;
Contractor Managers    those individuals or companies who run news agencies at the Properties on a self-employed basis pursuant to the Self Employed Agreements, as set out in part 2 of schedule 7;
Control   

means the power of a person to secure that the affairs of the body corporate are conducted in accordance with the wishes of that person:

 

(a)     by means of the holding of shares, or the possession of voting power, in or in relation to that or any other body corporate; or

 

(b)     by virtue of any powers conferred by the constitutional or corporate documents, or any other document, regulating that or any other body corporate,

 

5


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

     and a “Change of Control” occurs if a person who controls, or persons who control, any company ceases to do so, or if another person acquires, or other persons acquire, control of it;
Covenants    the covenants on the part of the tenant in a lease of a Property and all other matters, interests or encumbrances affecting that Property howsoever arising;
Data Room    the data room located at the offices of the Seller’s Solicitors at Adelaide House, London Bridge, London EC4R 9HA comprising the documents in relation to the Company and the list of assets attached to the Disclosure Letter;
Deferred Consideration    the portion of the Upfront Consideration payable in accordance with clauses 3.2.2 to 3.2.4;
Disclosure Letter    the disclosure letter, of today’s date, from the Seller to the Buyer;
Encumbrance    means a mortgage, charge, pledge, lien, option, restriction, right of first refusal, right of pre emption, third party right or interest, other encumbrance or security interest of any kind, or another type of agreement or arrangement having similar effect;
Environment    all or any of the following media: land (including, without limitation, any building structure or receptacle in on over or under it); water (including, without limitation, surface coastal and ground waters); and air (including, without limitation, the atmosphere within any natural or man-made structure or receptacle above or below ground);

 

6


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

Excluded Leasehold Properties    the leasehold properties set out in part 4 of schedule 5;
Excluded Stock    the stock at the Properties at Completion of the class, category or type set out in part 1 of schedule 6;
Freehold Excluded Properties    the freehold properties in respect of which leases have been executed as at today’s date;
FRS    a financial reporting standard issued or adopted by The Accounting Standards Board Limited;
Group    in relation to any party, that party and any company which is a Parent Undertaking or Subsidiary Undertaking of that party for the time being or a Subsidiary Undertaking of a Parent Undertaking of that party and any of them but, in relation to the Seller, shall exclude the Company;
Hive-up Agreement    the agreement, in the Agreed Form, relating to the transfer of the Excluded Leasehold Properties;
Hive-up Proceeds    the amount payable by T&S Stores Limited to the Company pursuant to the Hive-up Agreement less £12,465;
ICTA    Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988;
Indemnified Costs    as defined in clause 11.2;
Information Technology Systems    means any and all computer, telecommunications and network equipment used by the Company;
Intellectual Property   

means:

 

(a)     patents, trade marks, service marks, registered designs, applications and

 

7


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

    

rights to apply for any of those rights, trade, business and company names, unregistered trade marks, copyrights, database rights, rights in software and knowhow;

 

(b)     rights under licences, consents, orders, statutes or otherwise in relation to a right in paragraph (a);

 

(c)     rights of the same or similar effect or nature as or to those in paragraphs (a) and (b) which now or in the future may subsist; and

 

(d)     the right to sue for past infringements of any of the foregoing rights;

Intellectual Property Rights    means all material Intellectual Property owned by the Company or which is material to the Business;
Investigation    as defined in clause 10.1;
ITEPA    Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;
Key Employee    any person who is employed or engaged by the Company in a managerial capacity (including, for the avoidance of doubt, store managers) and/or is in the possession of Confidential Information;
Last Accounts    the audited balance sheet as at the Last Accounts Date, and the audited profit and loss account for the period ending on the Last Accounts Date, including the directors’ report and notes, as attached to the Disclosure Letter;
Last Accounts Date    28 February 2004;
Last Management Accounts    the management accounts of the Company which

 

8


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

     formed the basis for the Last Accounts;
Management Accounts    the unaudited profit and loss account of the Company in respect of the period starting on the day after the Last Accounts Date and ending 3 July 2004 and the unaudited balance sheet of the Company as at 3 July 2004, as attached to the Disclosure Letter;
Material Contract    as defined in paragraph 13.1 of part 7 of schedule 2;
Net Assets    the value of the assets less liabilities of the Company as set out in the Net Assets Statement;
Net Assets Statement    the statement of net assets of the Company as at the date of Completion, prepared and agreed or determined in accordance with schedule 3;
Parent Undertaking    a parent undertaking as defined in s258 CA;
Past Tenant(s)    the legal owner of the Assigned Properties immediately before they were assigned to the Company;
PAYE System    the system operated pursuant to Part II ITEPA (assessment, collection, recovery and appeals) and any regulations made pursuant to that part of ITEPA;
Permit    a permit, licence, consent, approval, certificate, qualification, specification, registration or other authorisation;
Post Offices    the post offices operated by the Company as noted in part 1 of schedule 5;
Present Tenant(s)    the present legal owner of the Unassigned Properties;

 

9


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

Properties (or Property)    the Assigned Properties and Unassigned Properties as set out in part 1 of schedule 5 or (where applicable) any one of them;
Proven Claim    a claim made by the Buyer against the Seller pursuant to this agreement which is resolved by a court or other tribunal in favour of the Buyer or agreed to in writing by the Seller;
Qualifying Intra-Group Transaction    a transaction between any members of the Buyer’s Group and which does not result in a reduction in the net assets of the Buyer of more than £8.3m;
Relevant Claim    as defined in paragraph 2 of part 3 of schedule 7;
Restricted Person    any person who or which has at any time during the period of 12 months immediately preceding Completion had dealings with the Business as a supplier;
Sale    a Change of Control of the Company or its ultimate Parent Undertaking or the sale or disposal of the whole or a material part of the undertaking or assets or business of the Company other than, in each case, pursuant to a Qualifying Intra-Group Transaction;
Sample Stock    as defined in paragraph 1 of part 5 of schedule 3;
Sample Stocktake    as defined in paragraph 1 of part 5 of schedule 3;
Scheme    as defined in clause 11.2;
Self Employed Agreements    the agreements with the Contractor Managers, a pro forma of which is set out in the Disclosure Letter;

 

10


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

Seller’s Accountants    PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP of Donington Court, Pegasus Business Park, Castle Donington, East Midlands DE74 2UZ;
Seller’s Schemes    the retirement benefits schemes operated by the Seller or its Associates known as the “T&S Stores Senior Executives Pension Scheme”, and the “AXA Stakeholder Scheme”;
Seller’s Solicitors    Berwin Leighton Paisner of Adelaide House, London Bridge, London EC4R 9HA;
Senior Executives    those members of Staff being in receipt of a salary of more than £35,000 per annum;
Shares    20,000,000 issued ordinary shares of £1 each comprising the entire issued share capital of the Company as at Completion;
SSAP    a statement of standard accounting practice adopted by The Accounting Standards Board Limited;
Staff    those employees of the Company working within or providing services to the Business as set out in part 1 of schedule 7;
Statutory Notices    notices of defective premises under s76 of the Building Act 1984;
Stock    the stock in trade of the Business located at the Properties at Completion and which physically exists, is on profile, in date, not short-coded and is otherwise in saleable condition owned by, or under the control of, the Seller, but does not include the Excluded Stock;
Stock Payment    the amount payable for Stock, as determined in accordance with clause 3.4;

 

11


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

Stocktake Properties    those of the Properties set out in part 2 of schedule 6;
Subsidiary Undertaking    a subsidiary undertaking as defined in s258 CA;
Tax or Taxation    has the same meaning as in the Tax Deed;
Tax Deed    the deed in the Agreed Form relating to Tax;
Taxation Authority    has the same meaning as in the Tax Deed;
TCGA    Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992;
TMA    Taxes Management Act 1970;
Trade Creditors   

all amounts owing by the Company:

 

(a)     for goods invoiced and received by the Company in respect of the Business prior to Completion for which a cash payment has not been made up to and including Completion;

 

(b)     for goods received by the Company in respect of the Business prior to Completion but not yet invoiced; and

 

(c)     the entire amount owed to Camelot and Paypoint as at Completion,

 

but, for the avoidance of doubt, excluding the items set out under the headings “Creditors falling due within one year” and “Other Creditors including tax and social security” in part 3 of schedule 3;

Transaction Documents    as defined in paragraph 1 of part 1 of schedule 2;
TSA    the transitional services agreement between T&S

 

12


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

     Stores Limited, the Buyer and the Company, in the Agreed Form, relating to the provision of specified services following Completion;
UK GAAP    all statements of SAAP, FRS(s) and Urgent Issues Task Force Abstracts issued by the Accounting Standards Board;
Unassigned Properties    the Properties which, at Completion, have not been legally assigned to the Company as set out in part 3 of schedule 5;
Unbanked Cash    as defined in clause 6.1.3;
Undisclosed Employee    as defined in clause 12.1;
Upfront Consideration    the portion of the Consideration payable in accordance with clause 3.2;
VAT    value added tax or any similar or substituted tax including, where relevant, the same or similar taxes in the Republic of Ireland, Isle of Man and the Channel Islands;
VATA    Value Added Tax Act 1994; and
Warranties    the warranties of the Seller set out in schedule 2.

 

1.2 In this agreement, a reference to:

 

  1.2.1 liability under, pursuant to or arising out of (or any analogous expression) any agreement, contract, deed or other instrument includes a reference to contingent liability under, pursuant to or arising out of (or any analogous expression) that agreement, contract, deed or other instrument; and

 

  1.2.2

a “person” includes a reference to any individual, firm, company, corporation or other body corporate, government, state or agency of a state or any joint venture, association or partnership, works council

 

13


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

or employee representative body (whether or not having separate legal personality).

 

1.3 Unless it is inconsistent with the context, in this agreement a reference to a statutory provision includes a reference to:

 

  1.3.1 a statutory amendment, modification, consolidation or re-enactment (whether before or after the date of this agreement);

 

  1.3.2 statutory instruments or subordinate legislation or orders made under the statutory provision; and

 

  1.3.3 statutory provisions of which the statutory provision is an amendment, modification, consolidation or re-enactment,

 

but does not include a substituted provision.

 

1.4 Words denoting the singular include the plural and vice versa; words denoting one gender include all genders; words denoting persons include corporations and vice versa.

 

1.5 Unless otherwise stated, a reference to a clause or schedule is a reference to a clause of or schedule to, this agreement and a reference to this agreement includes its schedules.

 

1.6 Clause headings in this agreement and in the schedules are for ease of reference only and do not affect the construction of any provision.

 

1.7 In construing this agreement, the so-called ejusdem generis rule does not apply and, accordingly, the interpretation of general words shall not be restricted by words indicating a particular class or particular examples.

 

1.8 All schedules that are attached to this agreement are incorporated into this agreement and shall be deemed to be part of this agreement.

 

2 Agreement for sale

 

2.1 Subject to the terms of this agreement, the Seller shall sell with full title guarantee and the Buyer shall purchase the Shares, with all rights attaching to them, with effect from Completion free of any Encumbrance.

 

2.2

The Seller waives all rights of pre-emption and other restrictions on transfer over the Shares conferred on it and shall procure that all such rights conferred on any

 

14


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

other person are waived not later than Completion so as to permit the sale and purchase of the Shares.

 

3 Consideration

 

3.1 The consideration for the Shares shall be the amount of the Upfront Consideration, as adjusted upwards or downwards in accordance with clause 4, plus the Stock Payment plus the Cash Proceeds plus the Unbanked Cash plus the Hive-up Proceeds.

 

3.2 Subject to clauses 3.3, 4 and 15.2, the Buyer shall pay the Upfront Consideration to the Seller as follows:

 

  3.2.1 as to the sum of £1,952,950, in cash at Completion;

 

  3.2.2 as to the sum of £1,952,950, in cash on the date which is six calendar months from Completion;

 

  3.2.3 as to the sum of £1,952,950, in cash on the date which is 12 calendar months from Completion; and

 

  3.2.4 as to the sum of £2,441,150, in cash on the date which is 18 calendar months from Completion,

 

provided that if any date on which payment is due is not a Business Day, then payment shall be made on the next Business Day.

 

3.3 In the event of a Sale:

 

  3.3.1 the Buyer shall promptly give notice of such Sale to the Seller; and

 

  3.3.2 the Buyer shall pay any outstanding Deferred Consideration to the Seller within ten Business Days of such Sale.

 

3.4 Payment for the Stock shall be made by the Buyer to the Seller in accordance with part 5 of schedule 3.

 

3.5 Any payment by the Buyer to the Seller for the purposes of this agreement shall be paid by telegraphic transfer to the client account of the Seller’s Solicitors at Barclays Bank Plc, 54 Lombard Street, London EC3P 3AH, sort code: 20-65-82, account number 50089753, Berwin Leighton Paisner client account ref: AEGR/T273/534.

 

15


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

3.6 Any payment by the Seller to the Buyer for the purposes of this agreement shall be paid by telegraphic transfer to the account of the Buyer at National Westminster Bank Plc, sort code 56-00-27, account number 27553507.

 

4 Net Assets Statement and adjustment to Consideration

 

4.1 The Net Assets Statement shall be prepared and agreed or determined in accordance with the principles and procedures set out in parts 1, 2 and 4 of schedule 3.

 

4.2 The Net Assets Statement shall be in the format set out in part 3 of schedule 3.

 

4.3 If the amount of the Net Assets as shown by the Net Assets Statement:

 

  4.3.1 exceeds £6,231,895 by an amount which is more than £10,000, the Upfront Consideration shall be increased on a pound for pound basis by the whole of that amount over £6,231,895 and clause 4.4 shall apply; or

 

  4.3.2 is less than £6,231,895 by an amount which is more than £10,000, the Upfront Consideration shall be reduced on a pound for pound basis for the whole of that amount under £6,231,895 and clause 4.5 shall apply.

 

4.4 If the Upfront Consideration is increased in accordance with clause 4.3.1, the Buyer shall pay to the Seller the amount of such increase in cash within three Business Days of agreement or determination of the Net Assets Statement.

 

4.5 If the Upfront Consideration is reduced in accordance with clause 4.3.2, the Seller shall pay to the Buyer the amount of such reduction in cash within three Business Days of agreement or determination of the Net Assets Statement.

 

4.6 If payment in full in accordance with clause 4.4 or 4.5 (as the case may be) is not made within the requisite time limit, the outstanding balance shall bear interest, from the date of agreement or determination of the Net Assets, at a rate equal to two per cent. over the base rate of Barclays Bank plc from time to time.

 

5 Completion

 

5.1 Completion shall take place at the offices of the Seller’s Solicitors, or such other place as the parties may agree, immediately after the signing of this agreement, when the transactions mentioned in clauses 5.2 to 5.8 shall take place.

 

16


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

5.2 The Seller shall deliver or procure the delivery to the Buyer of the following:

 

  5.2.1 a completed and signed transfer in respect of the Shares in favour of the Buyer, or its nominee(s) together with the share certificate(s) for the Shares;

 

  5.2.2 as evidence of the authority of each person executing a document referred to in this schedule on the Seller’s behalf:

 

  5.2.2.1 a copy of the minutes of a duly held meeting of the directors of the Seller (or a duly constituted committee thereof) authorising the execution by the Seller of the document and, where such execution is authorised by a committee of the board of directors of the Seller, a copy of the minutes of a duly held meeting of the directors constituting such committee or the relevant extract thereof; or

 

  5.2.2.2 a copy of the power of attorney conferring the authority, in each case certified to be true by a director or the secretary of the Seller or by the Seller’s Solicitors;

 

  5.2.3 the Tax Deed, duly executed by the Seller;

 

  5.2.4 the resignations of Steven Murrells and Julia Penfold as directors, and Patrick Burrows as the secretary, of the Company, in the Agreed Form;

 

  5.2.5 the resignation of the Company’s Auditors, in the Agreed Form;

 

  5.2.6 a power of attorney, in the Agreed Form, executed by the Seller in favour of the Buyer or its nominee(s) empowering the Buyer to exercise the Seller’s rights as shareholder of the Company pending the stamping and registration of the transfer referred to in clause 5.2.1;

 

  5.2.7 the statutory books of the Company made up to the date of Completion and its certificate of incorporation and common seal;

 

17


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

  5.2.8 a copy of each bank mandate of the Company and copies of statements of each bank account of the Company made up to the Business Day immediately before the date of Completion;

 

  5.2.9 the title deeds of the Properties (save that the title deeds of the Unassigned Properties shall only be made available for inspection);

 

  5.2.10 written confirmation from the Seller that there are no subsisting guarantees given by the Company in favour of the Seller or any of any of its Associates or by the Seller and its Associates in respect of any obligations of the Company and that, after compliance with clauses 5.3 and 5.4, neither the Seller nor its Associates will be indebted to the Company and the Company will not be indebted to either the Seller or its Associates;

 

  5.2.11 a certified copy of the Hive-up Agreement duly executed by the Company and the Seller;

 

  5.2.12 a duly executed deed of amendment which, with effect from Completion, terminates all indemnities given by the Company pursuant to the Call Option;

 

  5.2.13 the accounting books and records of the Company; and

 

  5.2.14 all confidentiality agreements or undertakings given to any member of the Seller’s Group by potential buyers of the Shares prior to their sale to the Buyer pursuant to this agreement.

 

5.3 The Seller and the Guarantor shall repay or procure to be repaid all amounts owing at Completion to the Company from the directors of the Company and their Associates and from the Seller and its Associates, whether due for payment or not.

 

5.4 The Seller shall procure that at Completion the Company shall repay all amounts owing by the Company to the directors of the Company and their Associates and to the Seller and its Associates whether due for payment or not.

 

5.5

With effect from Completion, the Seller and the Guarantor shall, to the extent each is lawfully permitted to do so, assign the benefit to the Buyer of all confidentiality undertakings given to it by all potential buyers of the Shares prior to their sale to the Buyer pursuant to this agreement. The Seller will send a letter, in the Agreed Form, to the other parties to such agreements and undertakings authorising the

 

18


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

Buyer to recover all information (as defined in such agreements or undertakings) or requesting certification of its destruction to the Buyer in each case in accordance with the terms of such agreements and undertakings.

 

5.6 The Guarantor shall procure that T&S Stores Limited enters into, and the Seller shall procure that the Company enters into, the TSA.

 

5.7 A board meeting of the Company shall be held at which:

 

  5.7.1 James Lancaster and Russell Cox are appointed additional directors;

 

  5.7.2 the Buyer’s Accountants are appointed as auditors of the Company;

 

  5.7.3 the transfer(s) referred to in clause 5.2.1 is (or are) approved (subject to stamping);

 

  5.7.4 the registered office of the Company is changed from its current address to an address notified to it by the Buyer;

 

  5.7.5 the accounting reference date of the Company is changed from its current date to a date notified to it by the Buyer;

 

  5.7.6 all forms relating to the change of directors of the Company described in clauses 5.2.4 and 5.7.1 are to be filed;

 

  5.7.7 the resignations referred to in clauses 5.2.4 and 5.2.5 are submitted and accepted; and

 

  5.7.8 each existing mandate given by the Company for the operation of its bank accounts is revoked and resolutions contained in new mandate(s) giving authority to persons nominated by the Buyer are passed.

 

5.8 The Buyer shall:

 

  5.8.1 pay or procure the payment of the portion of the Upfront Consideration due to the Seller on Completion pursuant to clause 3.2.1;

 

  5.8.2 deliver to the Seller a counterpart of the Tax Deed and the TSA, each duly executed by the Buyer;

 

19


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

  5.8.3 as evidence of the authority of each person executing a document referred to in this schedule on the Buyer’s behalf:

 

  5.8.3.1 a copy of the minutes of a duly held meeting of the directors of the Buyer (or a duly constituted committee thereof) authorising the execution by the Buyer of the document and, where such execution is authorised by a committee of the board of directors of the Buyer, a copy of the minutes of a duly held meeting of the directors constituting such committee or the relevant extract thereof; or

 

  5.8.3.2 a copy of the power of attorney conferring the authority; and

 

  5.8.4 pay or procure the payment of a sum (the “Cash Proceeds”) equal to the balance standing to the credit of the Bank Account at the commencement of business on the date of Completion (the “Bank Account Balance”) less £60,850. The Seller shall indemnify in full and keep fully indemnified the Buyer on demand against any and all losses, costs, liabilities, expenses, actions, proceedings, claims and demands incurred or suffered by the Buyer or the Company as a result of any drawings which reduce the Bank Account Balance.

 

5.9 The Buyer may, in its absolute discretion, waive any requirement contained in clauses 5.2 to 5.7, or may waive any of those requirements on condition that the Seller gives, on Completion, a written undertaking to the Buyer in such form and substance as the Buyer requires.

 

5.10 Neither party shall be obliged to complete this agreement unless:

 

  5.10.1 the other party complies with all its obligations under this clause 5; and

 

  5.10.2 the purchase of all the Shares is completed simultaneously.

 

6 Post-Completion undertakings

 

6.1 Following Completion:

 

  6.1.1

the Buyer undertakes to the Seller that it shall not, and it will procure that the Company shall not after Completion retrospectively alter the

 

20


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

accounting reference period of the Company commencing on 29 February 2004 to a date ending before Completion;

 

  6.1.2 the Buyer undertakes to the Seller to register the transfer of the Shares in the Company’s share register within 30 days after Completion; and

 

  6.1.3 the Buyer acknowledges that (and undertakes not to take any steps to prevent) the unbanked cash at the Properties at Completion (as evidenced by the physical cash at the Properties the value of which is supported by the cash sheets at each of the Properties) less a prescribed amount in respect of the till floats at a value of £27,150 (and, for the avoidance of doubt, excluding the Bank Account Balance and any other cash and any cash the subject of any bailment or other arrangement which precludes the Company from utilising such monies as a sole beneficial owner at Completion (including, for the avoidance of doubt, any rent deposits)) (the “Unbanked Cash”) will be banked into an account of a member of the Seller’s Group on the Business Day immediately following Completion.

 

6.2 From Completion:

 

  6.2.1 the Seller shall use its reasonable endeavours to assist the Buyer in obtaining the appointment of the Buyer or the Buyer’s nominee(s) to the posts of sub-postmaster at the Post Offices; and

 

  6.2.2 the Buyer shall apply for it or its nominee(s) to be appointed to the posts of sub-postmaster at the Post Offices and will use its best endeavours (which shall include the prompt provision of such references, accounts and other information as may be required in connection therewith) to obtain such appointment without delay.

 

6.3 The parties shall each pay their own fees and charges in connection with the appointment of the Buyer or its nominee(s) under clause 6.2.

 

6.4

All Trade Creditors as at Completion to the extent not taken into account in the Net Assets Statement shall remain the responsibility of the Seller after Completion. The Seller shall indemnify in full and keep fully indemnified the Buyer on demand against all losses, costs, liabilities, expenses, actions, proceedings, claims and demands incurred or suffered by the Buyer or the Company (including, without limitation, all legal expenses and other professional fees) arising out of or in

 

21


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

connection with the Trade Creditors as at Completion save to the extent that any such amount has been taken into account in the Net Assets Statement.

 

6.5 The Seller undertakes to transfer an amount equal to the aggregate residential lettings deposits (as set out in the Net Assets Statement) to an account nominated by the Buyer within ten Business Days of Completion.

 

6.6 The Seller shall indemnify in full and keep fully indemnified the Buyer on demand for and against all losses, costs, liabilities, expenses, actions, proceedings, claims and demands incurred or suffered by the Buyer or the Company (including, without limitation, all legal expenses and other professional fees) arising out of or in connection with the entry into by the Company of the Hive-up Agreement and the assumption by the Company of its obligations, and its performance of the transactions contemplated by, the Hive-up Agreement.

 

6.7 The Buyer agrees to pay to the Seller an amount equal to the Hive-Up Proceeds less £988, subject to receipt of the Hive-Up Proceeds from T&S Stores Limited, within two Business Days of such amount being paid to the Company.

 

6.8 The Seller and the Guarantor shall procure that any member of the Seller’s Group, shall provide reasonable assistance to the Buyer within 30 days of Completion to enable the Buyer access to the relevant accounting and financial information reasonably necessary to enable the Buyer to carry out a financial assistance whitewash in connection with this agreement.

 

6.9 It is acknowledged by the Seller that any costs in respect of the carrying out of the asbestos surveys referred to in paragraph 2.7.3 of part 1 of schedule 3 in excess of £37,000 shall be borne by the Seller.

 

7 Properties

 

The provisions of schedule 10 shall apply to the Properties.

 

8 Warranties by the Seller and limitations on liability

 

8.1 The Seller warrants to the Buyer that the statements in schedule 2 comprising the Warranties are accurate and not misleading, and that the Warranties (save for the Warranties set out in parts 1 and 2 of schedule 2) are given subject to any fact, matter, event or circumstance which has been fairly disclosed in the Disclosure Letter and specifically disclosed as set out in the Disclosure Letter.

 

22


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

8.2 A reference in schedule 2 to the Seller’s knowledge, information or belief is deemed to include knowledge, information and belief which the Seller would have if the Seller had made all reasonable enquiries and, without limitation, includes the knowledge, information and belief of Patrick Burrows, Andrew King, Robert Plummer, Steven Murrels, Nadine Sankar, Galen Levi, Julia Penfold and Colin Holmes and, for the avoidance of doubt, the Seller shall not be deemed to have any imputed knowledge other than as set out in this clause 8.3.

 

8.3 The rights and remedies of the Buyer in respect of a breach of the Warranties shall not be affected by Completion, or failing to exercise or delaying the exercise of a right or remedy, or by anything else, except a specific authorised written waiver or release, and no single or partial exercise of a right or remedy shall preclude a further or other exercise.

 

8.4 Except in the case of fraud, none of the information supplied by the Company or its professional advisers to the Seller, or its agents, representatives or advisers, in connection with the Warranties and the contents of the Disclosure Letter, or otherwise in relation to the business or affairs of the Company, shall be deemed a representation as to its accuracy by the Company to the Seller, and the Seller waives all claims against the Company which it might otherwise have in respect of such information.

 

8.5 Each Warranty is to be construed independently and (except where this agreement provides otherwise) is not limited by a provision of this agreement or another Warranty.

 

8.6 The provisions of schedule 4 apply in respect of the Warranties and other claims made by the Buyer against the Seller as set out in such schedule to limit the liability of the Seller.

 

8.7 It is acknowledged by the parties that the Buyer:

 

  8.7.1 is entering into this agreement in reliance upon the Warranties;

 

  8.7.2 does not enter into this agreement on the basis of, and does not rely upon, any warranty or any representation or other provision made or agreed to by any person (whether a party to this agreement or not) which is not set out in the Transaction Documents; and

 

  8.7.3

may rely on the Warranties to the extent and subject to the limitations set out in this agreement in warranting to any subsequent

 

23


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

Buyer of all or any of the Shares or of all or any part of the undertakings of the Company.

 

8.8 Except in the case of fraud, the Buyer shall, to the extent that there is a breach of the Warranties, be entitled to claim for breach of the Warranties only and shall not be entitled to any other remedy.

 

8.9 The Seller shall indemnify in full and keep fully indemnified the Buyer on demand for and against all losses, costs, liabilities, expenses, actions, proceedings claims and demands incurred or suffered by the Buyer or the Company (including without limitation all legal expenses and other professional fees) arising out of or in connection with the assumption and performance by the Company of its obligations or the granting by the Company of any indemnities under the Call Option in respect of the period from 20 February 2003 until Completion.

 

9 Warranties by the Buyer

 

The Buyer warrants to the Seller that:

 

9.1 it is a company in good standing, duly incorporated and organised and validly existing under the laws of England and Wales;

 

9.2 it has the right, power and authority and has taken all action necessary and required to enter into and perform its obligations under this agreement and each document to be executed by it in connection with or as contemplated by this agreement at or before Completion; and

 

9.3 neither the entry into this agreement nor the implementation of the transactions contemplated by it will result in:

 

  9.3.1 a violation or breach of any provision of the by-laws or equivalent constitutional documents of the Buyer;

 

  9.3.2 a breach of, or give rise to a default under, any contract or other instrument to which the Buyer is a party or by which it is bound; or

 

  9.3.3 a violation or breach of any applicable laws or regulations or of any order, decree or judgment of any court, governmental agency or regulatory authority applicable to the Buyer or any of its assets.

 

24


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

10 Competition

 

10.1 The Seller and the Buyer shall use all reasonable efforts to co-operate with each other in connection with any investigation of the transaction contemplated by this agreement carried out by the Office of Fair Trading (“OFT”) and/or the Competition Commission (“CC”) under the Enterprise Act 2002 (“EA”) (“Investigation”), which co-operation shall include:

 

  10.1.1 the Seller co-operating with the Buyer to ensure that all information reasonably necessary for the making of any notifications or filings (including draft versions) made in respect of this agreement (or responding to any requests for further information consequent upon) is:

 

  10.1.1.1 supplied promptly; and

 

  10.1.1.2 complete and accurate,

 

provided that the Seller shall not be required to provide the Buyer with any information that is of a commercially sensitive nature and that does not relate to the Business;

 

  10.1.2 each party notifying the other party, and providing copies, in a timely fashion, of any communications from the OFT or CC which are relevant to the Investigation unless such notification is expressly prohibited by the OFT and/or CC or by law;

 

  10.1.3 where reasonably requested by the other party and appropriate:

 

  10.1.3.1 providing that party (or advisers nominated by that party) with draft copies of all submissions or communications to the OFT or the CC in relation to the Investigation at such time as will allow that party a reasonable opportunity to provide comments on such submissions and communications before they are submitted or sent to the OFT or the CC unless such notification is expressly prohibited by the OFT and/or the CC or by law;

 

  10.1.3.2 taking into account any comments of that party as are reasonable; and

 

25


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

  10.1.3.3 providing that party (or such nominated adviser) with copies of all such submissions and communications in the form submitted or sent provided that neither the Seller or the Buyer shall be required to provide the other with copies of any element of such communications or submissions which contains information of a commercially sensitive nature and provided that such notification is not expressly prohibited by the OFT and/or the CC or by law; and

 

  10.1.4 where either party attends separate meetings with the OFT or the CC, it shall, within a reasonable period of time thereafter, inform the other party (or its nominated advisers) of the substance and outcome of any such meeting unless such notification is prohibited by the OFT and/or the CC or by law or is of a commercially sensitive nature.

 

10.2 If the OFT or the CC makes a decision under section 73(2) or 41(2) of the EA respectively requiring the Buyer to dispose of any Unassigned Property that has not been legally assigned to the Company at the date of the decision, then the provisions of paragraph 7 of part 2 of schedule 10 shall apply in relation to such Unassigned Property.

 

11 Pensions

 

11.1 The Seller undertakes to pay to the Buyer (by way of an adjustment to the Consideration) an amount equal to the Indemnified Costs (as defined in clause 11.2).

 

11.2 For the purposes of clause 11.1, “Indemnified Costs” means all loss, liabilities and costs of the Buyer, any Associate of the Buyer or the Company arising out of or which may arise out of the operation of section 75 of the Pensions Act 1995 in relation to the T&S Stores Senior Executives Pension Scheme (the “Scheme”) and any other liability to make any other payment to or in respect of the Scheme.

 

11.3 The Seller shall procure that the trustees of the Scheme will augment the benefits for Mr Parsons so that he will be credited with pensionable service as if he had remained an active member of the defined benefit section of the Scheme up until the end of December 2004.

 

26


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

12 Employment

 

12.1 If it is established within the two-year period after Completion that any person not listed in schedule 7 is employed by the Company (the “Undisclosed Employee”) pursuant to the arrangements in place at Completion, the Company shall be entitled to terminate the Undisclosed Employee’s employment and, provided that it does so terminate as soon as reasonably practicable, the Buyer shall be indemnified by the Seller in respect of each loss, liability and cost which the Buyer or the Company may sustain arising in connection with the termination of the Undisclosed Employee’s contract of employment.

 

12.2 The Seller shall indemnify the Buyer or the Company and keep it fully indemnified at all times against any assessments determination or demands levied or made by the Inland Revenue and/or the Contributions Agency for any income tax and national insurance contributions payable by the Company for any period of employment of the Contractor Manager or Undisclosed Employee prior to Completion (the “After-Assessed Employee Tax”) and any interest, charges or penalties arising in respect of such liability referable to the period prior to Completion, together with any loss, liability and cost incurred by the Company in contesting any claim where requested to do so by the Seller pursuant to the provisions of part 3 of schedule 7.

 

12.3 The Seller shall indemnify the Company (or Buyer as appropriate) and keep it fully indemnified at all times against each loss, liability and cost which it may sustain as a result of any claim by any member of Staff, Contractor Manager or Undisclosed Employee for any matter whatsoever (including but not limited to claims of discrimination and breach of contract) arising from any act or omission of the Company (or the Contractor Managers, in the case of employees of the Contractor Managers) prior to Completion provided that:

 

  12.3.1 this indemnity shall not apply in respect to any After-Assessed Employee Tax (which shall be dealt with in accordance with clause 12.2); and

 

  12.3.2 where the claim relates to any act or omission of the Company which continues after Completion, the Seller shall only be liable for any loss liability and cost referable to the period up to and including Completion.

 

12.4

Following Completion, the Buyer shall not (and shall procure that each member of the Buyer’s Group shall not), directly or indirectly, without the written consent of the

 

27


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

Seller, make any unsolicited disclosures or statements to any person (not being a Contractor Manager), firm, company, regulatory authority or government body (not being a court or tribunal) which is intended to undermine the self-employed status of the Contractor Managers provided that nothing in this clause shall prevent the Buyer from complying with any legal obligation or from seeking advice from its professional advisers.

 

13 Restrictive agreement

 

13.1 To assure to the Buyer the full benefit of the business and goodwill of the Company, the Seller and the Guarantor each undertakes to the Buyer, for itself and as agent and trustee for the Company by way of further consideration for the obligations of the Buyer under this agreement, as a separate and independent agreement, that it will not and will procure that none of its Associates will, without the Buyer’s prior written consent:

 

  13.1.1 disclose to another person, or itself use for any purpose, and shall use all reasonable endeavours to prevent the publication or disclosure of, Confidential Information;

 

  13.1.2 for 12 months after Completion, in relation to a business which is the same as the Business, either on its own account or for another person, directly or indirectly solicit, interfere with or endeavour to entice away from the Company any Restricted Person or Key Employee; or

 

  13.1.3 for a period of two years after Completion, either alone or jointly with, through or as adviser to, or agent of, or manager for, any person, directly or indirectly carry on or be engaged, concerned or interested in or assist a business which trades under the “One Stop” brand which competes, directly or indirectly, with the Business within a radius of one quarter of a mile of any Property provided that this sub-clause 13.1.3 does not apply in respect of any properties or trading stores subsequently acquired by any member of the Seller’s Group which are acquired as a part of a wider transaction (for these purposes, “wider transaction” means the acquisition of five or more properties or trading stores).

 

28


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

13.2 The Seller and the Guarantor each agrees that the covenants and undertakings contained in clause 13.1 are reasonable and are entered into for the purpose of protecting the goodwill of the business of the Company.

 

13.3 Each undertaking contained in clause 13.1 shall be construed as a separate undertaking. If one or more of them is held to be against the public interest or unlawful or an unreasonable restraint of trade, the remaining undertakings shall continue to bind the Seller and the Guarantor.

 

13.4 Nothing in this clause shall prevent the Seller or the Guarantor or any other member of the Seller’s Group from:

 

  13.4.1 continuing to operate a business operated by the Seller or the Guarantor or any member of the Seller’s Group on the date of this agreement; or

 

  13.4.2 complying with a legally enforceable obligation existing at Completion or with a rule of law or requirement of a regulatory authority.

 

13.5 Following Completion, the Buyer shall not, and shall procure that the Company and each member of the Buyer’s Group shall not:

 

  13.5.1 use or carry on business under a name now used by the Seller or the Guarantor or any member of the Seller’s Group (excluding the Company) in any business or a similar name or style of name or style which may indicate a connection with the Seller or the Guarantor or any member of the Seller’s Group (excluding, for the purposes of this clause, the right granted to the Seller under clause 13.7); or

 

  13.5.2 hold itself out as being connected with the Seller or the Guarantor or any member of the Seller’s Group (excluding the Company) (excluding, for the purposes of this clause, the right granted to the Seller under clause 13.7).

 

13.6 Subject to clause 13.7, following Completion the Seller shall not, and the Seller and the Guarantor shall procure that none of their respective Associates shall, use or carry on business under the name “Dillons”, “Mr News”, “Paper Shop”, “Paper Chain”, “Gibbs News” and “Gibbs” or a similar name or style of name or style which may indicate a connection with the Business or the Company.

 

29


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

13.7 Clause 13.6 shall not apply to the Excluded Leasehold Properties for a period of 17 weeks from Completion during which period such properties shall be permitted to continue to trade under the name “Dillons” provided that the Seller shall not and the Seller and the Guarantor shall procure that none of their respective Associates shall, do or omit to do anything which may damage any goodwill of the Business.

 

14 Guarantee

 

14.1 The Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees to the Buyer the due and punctual performance of each obligation of the Seller contained in this agreement (subject to the limitations set out in this agreement). The Guarantor shall pay to the Buyer from time to time within five Business Days of demand any sum of money which the Seller is at any time required to pay to the Buyer under or pursuant to this agreement and which has not been paid at the time the demand is made. The Guarantor’s obligations under this clause are primary obligations and not those of a mere surety.

 

14.2 The Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally agrees to indemnify (and keep indemnified) the Buyer within five Business Days of demand against any loss, liability or cost incurred by the Buyer as a result of any obligation of the Seller referred to in clause 14.1 being or becoming void, voidable or unenforceable as against the Seller for any reason whatsoever. The amount of the loss, liability or cost shall be equal to the amount which the Buyer would otherwise have been entitled to recover from the Seller.

 

14.3 The Guarantor’s obligations under clauses 14.1 and 14.2 are continuing obligations and are not satisfied, discharged or affected by an intermediate payment or settlement of account by, or a change in the constitution or control of, or merger or consolidation with any other person of, or the insolvency of, or bankruptcy, winding up or analogous proceedings relating to, the Seller.

 

14.4 The Guarantor’s liabilities under clauses 14.1 and 14.2 are not affected by an arrangement which the Buyer may make with the Seller or with another person which (but for clause 14.4) might operate to diminish or discharge the liability of or otherwise provide a defence to a surety.

 

14.5 Without affecting the generality of clause 14.4, the Buyer may at any time it thinks fit and without reference to the Guarantor and without prejudice to the Guarantor’s obligations under this clause 14:

 

  14.5.1 grant a time for payment or grant another indulgence or agree to an amendment, variation, waiver or release in respect of an obligation of the Seller under this agreement;

 

30


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

  14.5.2 give up, deal with, vary, exchange or abstain from perfecting or enforcing other securities or guarantees held by the Buyer;

 

  14.5.3 discharge a party to other securities or guarantees held by the Buyer and realise all or any of those securities or guarantees; and

 

  14.5.4 compound with, accept compositions from and make other arrangements with the Seller or a person or persons liable on other securities or guarantees held or to be held by the Buyer.

 

14.6 So long as the Seller is under an actual or contingent obligation under this agreement the Guarantor shall not exercise a right which it may at any time have by reason of the performance of its obligations under clauses 14.1 and 14.2 to be indemnified by the Seller, to claim a contribution from another surety of the Seller’s obligations or to take the benefit (wholly or partly and by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any of the Seller’s rights under this agreement or of any other security taken by the Seller in connection with this agreement.

 

14.7 The Guarantor’s liabilities under clauses 14.1 and 14.2 are not affected by the avoidance of an assurance, security or payment or a release, settlement or discharge which is given or made on the faith of an assurance, security or payment, in either case, under an enactment relating to bankruptcy or insolvency.

 

14.8 The Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring the Buyer (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from the Seller’s Guarantor under this clause 14. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of this agreement to the contrary.

 

15 Set-off

 

15.1 Subject to clause 15.2, payments due to be made by the Buyer to the Seller or by the Seller to the Buyer (as the case may be) shall be made without withholding, counterclaim, set-off or similar deduction.

 

15.2

The Buyer shall be entitled, but not obliged, at any time or times without notice to the Seller to set off any liability of the Seller to the Buyer pursuant to a Proven

 

31


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

Claim against any liability of the Buyer to the Seller to pay the outstanding Deferred Consideration.

 

16 Assignment

 

16.1 Subject to clause 16.2, neither party shall be entitled to assign the benefit of this agreement or any part of it to any other person.

 

16.2 Subject to the provisions of clause 3.3, notwithstanding any other provisions in this agreement or any of the other agreements entered into by the Seller and the Buyer under or in connection with this agreement, the Buyer shall be entitled to assign the benefit of this agreement to a transferee of the Shares which is a member of the Buyer’s Group, provided that the Buyer shall procure that if such transferee ceases to be a member of the Buyer’s Group, the benefit of this agreement is re-assigned back to it or (at the discretion of the Buyer) a member of its Group.

 

16.3 Subject to clause 16.2, the liability of the Seller shall cease if the Buyer assigns, or purports to assign, any of its rights under this agreement without the Seller’s prior written consent or makes or purports to make a declaration of trust in respect of any of those rights.

 

17 Announcements

 

17.1 No announcement shall be made in relation to this agreement, except for the announcement in the Agreed Form or otherwise as specifically agreed between the parties, unless (and to the extent only that) an announcement is required by law, by a rule of a listing authority or a stock exchange on which the securities of any member of the party’s Group are listed or traded or by a governmental authority to which any member of the party’s Group is subject or submits, provided that, if practicable, the party making the announcement shall have first consulted on the content and timing and taken in to account the reasonable requirements of the other party.

 

17.2 Except as required by law or any regulatory body or as expressly provided for in this agreement, the Seller and the Buyer shall keep confidential this agreement and its terms and conditions and shall not disclose the same to any third party without the prior written consent of the other party (and, for the avoidance of doubt, this includes the Buyer keeping confidential the matter specifically disclosed against paragraph 17 of part 7 of schedule 2, as set out in the Disclosure Letter).

 

32


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

18 Costs

 

All expenses incurred by or on behalf of the parties, including, without limitation, the fees of agents, representatives, solicitors, accountants, actuaries, brokers, financiers and introducers employed by any of them in connection with the negotiation, preparation or execution of this agreement, shall be borne by the party who incurred the liability.

 

19 Payments free of withholding etc.

 

19.1 All payments made by the Seller under this agreement and under the Tax Deed shall be made gross, free of any rights of counterclaim or set-off without deduction or withholding of any kind other than any deduction or withholding required by law.

 

19.2 If the Seller makes a deduction or withholding required by law from a payment under the agreement or the Tax Deed, the sum due from the Seller shall be increased to the extent necessary to ensure that, after the making of any deduction or withholding, the Buyer receives a sum equal to the sum it would have received had no deduction or withholding been made.

 

19.3 If a payment made by the Seller under the agreement or the Tax Deed will be or has been subject to Tax, the Seller shall pay to the Buyer the amount (after taking into account Tax Payable in respect of the amount) that will ensure that the Buyer receives and retains a net sum equal to the sum it would have received had the payment not been subject to Tax.

 

20 Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

 

20.1 Unless the right of enforcement is expressly granted, it is not intended that a third party should have the right to enforce a provision of this agreement pursuant to the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999.

 

20.2 The parties may vary this agreement without the consent of a third party to whom an express right to enforce any of its terms has been provided.

 

21 Communications

 

21.1 All communications between the parties with respect to this agreement shall:

 

  21.1.1

be delivered by hand, or sent by first-class prepaid post, to the address in Great Britain of the addressee as set out in this agreement

 

33


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

 

or to such other address as the addressee notifies for the purpose of this clause; or

 

  21.1.2 be sent by fax to the fax number stated below or as notified for the purpose of this clause.

 

21.2 Communications shall be deemed to have been received as follows:

 

  21.2.1 (if sent by post) two Business Days after posting;

 

  21.2.2 (if delivered by hand) on the day of delivery, if delivered at least two hours before the close of Business Hours on a Business Day, and otherwise on the next Business Day; and

 

  21.2.3 (if sent by fax) at the time of transmission, if received at least two hours before the close of Business Hours on a Business Day, and otherwise on the next Business Day.

 

21.3 The address and fax numbers of each party are:

 

Seller     
Address:    Tesco House, Delamare Road, Cheshunt, Hertfordshire EN8 9SL
Fax:    01992 644809
Marked for the attention of:    The Company Secretary (with a copy to Berwin Leighton Paisner (marked with the reference AEGR/T273/534))
Buyer     
Address:    Forbuoys Limited
    

TM House, Ashwells Road, Pilgrims

Hatch, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST

Fax:    01277 375 870
Marked for the attention of:   

The Company Secretary (with a copy to

Clifford Chance for the attention of

Simon Tinkler)

 

34


Schedule 10

Property Conditions

 

22 Invalidity

 

If a term in or provision of this agreement is held to be illegal or unenforceable, in whole or in part, under an enactment or rule of law, it shall to that extent be deemed not to form part of this agreement and the enforceability of the remainder of this agreement shall not be affected.

 

23 Whole agreement

 

This agreement and the documents referred to in this agreement contain the whole agreement between the parties relating to the transactions provided for in this agreement and supersedes all previous agreements (if any) between such parties in respect of such matters and each of the parties acknowledges that in agreeing to enter into this agreement it has not relied upon any pre-contractual statement, representation or opinion (whether oral or written and whether express or implied) made by the other(s) and/or any Associate of the other(s) or any of their respective officers, employees or advisers.

 

24 Counterparts

 

This agreement may be executed in any number of separate counterparts, each of which when executed and delivered shall be an original, but all the counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument.

 

25 Proper law

 

The construction, validity and performance of this agreement are governed by the laws of England and Wales and the parties submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

 

Delivered as a deed on the date of this document.

 

35


Executed as a deed by

   )
STATUSFLOAT LIMITED    ) /s/ S G Murrells

acting by its duly authorised attorney:

   )

/s/ A Clarke

    

Executed as a deed by

   )
FORBUOYS LIMITED    )

acting by:

   )
     Director /s/ J Lancaster
     Director/Secretary /s/ Russell Cox

Executed as a deed by

   )
TESCO PLC    ) /s/ S G Murrells

acting by its duly authorised attorney:

   )

/s/ A Clarke

    

 

36

EX-4.3 3 dex43.htm FACILITIES AGREEMENT Facilities Agreement

Exhibit 4.3

 

FACILITIES AGREEMENT

 


 

FACILITY LETTER

 


 

BANK OF SCOTLAND

 

Funding of

 

£20,000,000

 

to

 

FORBUOYS LIMITED, MARTIN RETAIL GROUP LIMITED,

CLARK RETAIL LIMITED and TM VENDING LIMITED

 

2002

 


Bank of Scotland

 

PO Box 39900

Level 7, Bishopsgate Exchange

155 Bishopsgate

London

EC2M 3YB

 

Telephone: 020 7012 9227

Fax: 020 7012 9435/6

 

FORBUOYS LIMITED

 

TM House

Ashwells Road

Pilgrims Hatch

Essex CM15 9ST

(company number 298945)

 

MARTIN RETAIL GROUP LIMITED

 

Unit 11

The Avenue

Newton Mearns

Glasgow G77 6AA

(company number SC13840)

 

CLARK RETAIL LIMITED

 

Unit 11

The Avenue

Newton Mearns

Glasgow G77 6AA

(company number SC101099)

 

TM VENDING LIMITED

 

TM House

Ashwells Road

Pilgrims Hatch

Essex CM15 9ST

(company number 1605108)

 

Dear Sirs,

 

REVOLVING CREDIT OF £15,000,000 and OVERDRAFT OF £5,000,000

 

We are pleased to offer you (each a “Borrower” and together the “Borrowers”) a revolving credit facility of £15,000,000 (the “Revolving Credit”) and an overdraft of £5,000,000 calculated on a net basis across the accounts of the Borrowers with BoS (the “Overdraft”) (the Revolving Credit and Overdraft, together the “Loans”) the same being in replacement of the secured revolving loan and guarantee facility incorporating an optional overdraft to, amongst others, TM Group Limited under the senior credit agreement between, amongst others, TM Group Limited, National Westminster Bank plc and the Banks (as defined therein) dated 28 November 1998. This offer is open for acceptance by the Borrower until 31 July 2002, when it will lapse. If accepted, this letter and its schedules will form the agreement between the Borrower and BoS for the Revolving Credit and Overdraft.

 

The definitions which shall apply to this letter are given in schedule 6.

 

1


1. Conditions Precedent

 

Neither Loan will be available until BoS has received, in form and substance satisfactory to it, the documents and evidence detailed in schedule 1.

 

2. Conditions Subsequent

 

The Borrowers shall procure that all Security Rights (other than Permitted Security Rights) owed by Group Companies and Marshell Group Limited to third parties will be discharged to the satisfaction of the Bank within one month of the date of this letter.

 

3. The Revolving Credit

 

  3.1 Purpose

 

The Borrower may only use the Revolving Credit to assist the Borrowers with their general working capital requirements and/or be utilised for:

 

  3.1.1 Guarantees;

 

  3.1.2 Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts;

 

  3.1.3 Letters of Credit;

 

on the terms and conditions set out below. For the avoidance of doubt, all utilisations under the Revolving Credit, Guarantees, Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts and Letters of Credit shall not exceed £15,000,000 (the “Limit”).

 

  3.2 Drawdown

 

  3.2.1 Subject to clause 3.2.2, the Borrower may draw the Revolving Credit in Revolving Credit Advances by giving a Notice of Drawdown no later than 11 am on the proposed date of drawdown (which must be a Business Day).

 

  3.2.2 Drawdown of each Revolving Credit Advance (other than a Rollover Advance which shall be conditional upon no Event of Default having occurred or resulting from BoS permitting such Rollover Advance) shall be conditional upon:

 

  3.2.2.1  no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default having occurred or resulting from BoS permitting its drawdown; and

 

  3.2.2.2  the amount of the Revolving Credit Advance requested being a minimum of £500,000 and not exceeding the undrawn amount of the Revolving Credit, less the amount of all other Revolving Credit Advances either drawn or previously requested in a Notice of Drawdown but not yet drawn.

 

  3.3 Availability

 

  3.3.1 The Revolving Credit shall be reviewed by BoS on the date falling 364 days after the date of this letter (the “Review Date”) and shall cease to be available on the Review Date when the Revolving Credit shall become immediately repayable unless BoS has agreed otherwise in writing.

 

  3.3.2 To ascertain compliance with the Limit, the total indebtedness of the Borrowers to BoS in respect of the Revolving Credit shall be calculated by adding together:

 

  (1) the aggregate amount of BoS exposure under all guarantees issued by BoS under this letter;

 

2


  (2) 10% of the face value of each Forward Foreign Exchange Contract entered into with BoS for a duration of up to 12 months under this letter and 20% (or such other figure as BoS advises under clause 5 below) in relation to those entered into for more than 12 months, in each case calculated on a daily basis at the then prevailing BoS spot rate of exchange;

 

  (3) the aggregate amount of BoS exposure under all Letters of Credit issued by BoS under this letter; and

 

  (4) all outstanding Revolving Credit Advances.

 

  3.4 Repayment

 

  3.4.1 Each Revolving Credit Advance drawn under the Revolving Credit shall (subject to the other provisions of this Agreement) be repaid by the Borrower on the last Business Day of each Interest Period for that Revolving Credit Advance and shall then be available for redrawing subject to clauses 3.2 and 3.3.

 

  3.4.2 If any part of the Revolving Credit is used for the purchase of an asset or property (excluding for the avoidance of doubt, trading stock or assets acquired in the ordinary course of business), the net proceeds of sale of that asset or property (if any) shall be paid to BoS in reduction or repayment of the Revolving Credit.

 

  3.5 Interest

 

  3.5.1 The period for which each Revolving Credit Advance is outstanding shall be divided into successive periods, each of which will start on the expiry of the previous period or, in the case of the first Interest Period, on drawdown of the Revolving Credit Advance.

 

  3.5.2 The Borrower will pay interest on each Revolving Credit Advance for each Interest Period at the annual rate which is the sum of (1) the Margin, (2) LIBOR and (3) the Mandatory Liquid Asset Costs.

 

  3.5.3 Interest will be paid in arrears on each Interest Payment Date.

 

  3.5.4 The Borrower may select Interest Periods of one week, one month, three months or six months (subject to clause 3.5.6 and/or as otherwise agreed by BoS).

 

  3.5.5 If the Borrower does not select an Interest Period by 11 am on the Business Day preceding its commencement, then, subject to clause 3.5.6, that Interest Period will be three months.

 

  3.5.6 No Interest Period may extend beyond the Final Repayment Date in respect of the Revolving Credit.

 

  3.5.7 If there is a repayment, prepayment or recovery of any part of a Revolving Credit Advance other than on the last day of an Interest Period, then the Borrower will pay BoS an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which (1) interest which would have been payable on the amount received at the end of that Interest Period exceeds (excluding the Margin for the period after the date of repayment, prepayment or recovery) (2) interest which, in the opinion of BoS, would have been payable on a deposit of equal amount placed with a prime bank in London for a period from the first Business Day after the early payment or recovery until the end of that Interest Period and the Borrower indemnifies BoS against any other costs, liabilities or expenses incurred by BoS because of that early payment or recovery.

 

3


  3.6 Voluntary Cancellation

 

  3.6.1 The Borrower may cancel all or any part of the undrawn Revolving Credit provided that it has given BoS not less than 5 Business Days’ notice in writing of its intention to cancel.

 

  3.6.2 Any undrawn amount of the Revolving Credit which is cancelled is not available for redrawing.

 

  3.7 Mandatory Prepayment and Cancellation

 

Upon a Change of Control, Sale or Flotation:

 

  3.7.1 the Borrower will prepay all amounts outstanding under the Revolving Credit (together with accrued interest); and

 

  3.7.2 the undrawn Revolving Credit will be automatically cancelled.

 

4. Guarantees

 

  4.1 On request by a Borrower, BoS will issue guarantees or performance bonds (up to in aggregate the Guarantee Limit) on its behalf. Before BoS issues a guarantee or bond on behalf of a Borrower:

 

  4.1.1 BoS must have approved the terms of the guarantee or bond; and

 

  4.1.2 that Borrower shall have executed and delivered to BoS a counter indemnity in a form acceptable to BoS agreeing to indemnify BoS against any claim under the guarantee or bond and authorising BoS to debit the amount of a claim to any of the Borrowers’ accounts.

 

  4.2 A charge of one point two five per cent (1.25%) of BoS outstanding liabilities (whether actual or contingent) from time to time under the guarantees shall be payable by the Borrowers in respect of guarantees or performance bonds issued by BoS on its behalf. This charge will be payable quarterly in advance on such dates as may be intimated by BoS.

 

5. Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts

 

  5.1 A Borrower may enter into Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts (up to in aggregate the FFEC Limit) with BoS for the purchase or sale of any freely convertible currency and with a maturity period of up to twelve months. For the purpose of calculating utilisations of this component of the Revolving Credit, BoS will assess its risk at 10% of the face value of each contract for a duration of up to 12 months and 20% in respect of contracts for more than 12 months unless BoS advises the relevant Borrower otherwise.

 

  5.2 The Borrowers must ensure that each of them make sufficient funds (either in Sterling or in the appropriate foreign currency) available to meet their obligations under each of the Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts as and when they fall due. In the event that the Borrowers fail to do so, the Borrowers shall be liable to BoS in respect of the difference between (1) the Sterling equivalent of the amount the Borrowers were due to pay BoS on completion of the relevant Forward Foreign Exchange Contract and (2) (if less) the Sterling equivalent of the amount which BoS would have received by completing that contract at the prevailing spot rate of exchange for the relevant currency on the date of completion of the contract.

 

  5.3 Whenever the Sterling equivalent of any currency amounts require to be calculated, it shall be calculated at the BoS spot rate of exchange for such currency on the applicable day at such time as BoS may select.

 

4


  5.4 Charges will be payable for the issue of Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts in accordance with the tariffs applicable to those services issued to the Borrowers from time to time.

 

6. Letters of Credit

 

  6.1 On receipt of an acceptable written application, BoS will issue Letters of Credit (up to in aggregate the Letter of Credit Limit) on behalf of a Borrower under the terms of the Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits (as revised from time to time) and otherwise on BoS standard terms and conditions (which will be set out in the BoS application for the documentary credit, a copy of which will be provided to the relevant Borrower if so requested).

 

  6.2 Charges will be payable for the issue of Letters of Credit in accordance with the tariffs applicable to those services issued to the Borrowers from time to time.

 

7. Overdraft

 

  7.1 The rate of interest applicable to the Overdraft shall be the annual rate which is the sum of one point two five per cent (1.25%) plus BoS base rate as that rate fluctuates. Interest will be calculated by BoS on a day to day basis on the cleared daily debit balance of the amount drawn down and will be debited to the relevant Borrower’s current accounts monthly in arrears on the Standard Application Dates. A notice of the accrued interest will be issued each month and interest applied 14 days after the date of that notice.

 

  7.2 Interest at the annual rate of one point two five per cent (1.25%) over BoS base rate as that rate fluctuates will accrue on the cleared credit balances on any current accounts held with BoS of each Borrower in respect of which BoS considers it has a valid right of set off (the “Credit Balances”) calculated on a daily basis and set off monthly in arrears on the Standard Application Dates against the interest due on the Overdraft, provided that interest on the Credit Balances will be calculated as follows:

 

  7.2.1 where the aggregate amount of the Credit Balances is less than or equal to the aggregate amount of the debit balances on any current account held with BoS of each Borrower (the “Debit Balances”), interest will be calculated on the full amount of the Credit Balances; and

 

  7.2.2 where the aggregate amount of the Credit Balances is greater than the aggregate amount of the Debit Balances, interest will be calculated on an amount equal to the aggregate of the Debit Balances.

 

  7.3 Availability of Overdraft

 

  7.3.1 BoS shall review the Overdraft on the date falling 364 days after the date of this letter (the “Review Date”). On the Review Date, the Overdraft will cease to be available unless BoS has agreed in writing to its renewal or extension. In ascertaining whether or not the Overdraft will be renewed or extended, BoS will require the Borrowers to deliver the financial information required by clause 11.2 by way of financial information prior to that decision being made.

 

  7.3.2 In accordance with normal banking practice, the Overdraft will be payable on demand.

 

  7.3.3 In some circumstances, BoS may demand payment before the Review Date. This may happen if BoS consider that:

 

  7.3.3.1  any of the terms or conditions of this letter have been breached; or

 

  7.3.3.2  the financial condition of any Borrower or any guarantor of any Borrower has altered in any material way; or

 

5


  7.3.3.3  the Overdraft was agreed on the basis of incorrect or incomplete information from the Borrowers; or

 

  7.3.3.4  (acting reasonably) the basis upon which the Overdraft was agreed by BoS has altered in any material way.

 

  7.3.4 If repayment of the Overdraft is demanded, any other utilisation (by way of Guarantee, Foreign Forward Exchange Contract or Letters of Credit) will cease to be available and the Borrowers shall immediately comply with that request. Any determination by BoS of any amount of principal, interest, commission or charges or an applicable interest rate shall, in the absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence of such amount.

 

8. Default Interest

 

  8.1 If the Borrower fails to pay any sum under or in relation to any Loan on its due date then the Borrower will pay interest on it until it is paid at the Default Rate.

 

  8.2 Default interest payable must be paid monthly in arrears and if not paid will itself bear interest at the Default Rate.

 

9. Security

 

  9.1 As security for the Loans and any other money owing or incurred to BoS by any Group Company (including contingent liabilities and all amounts due to BoS in respect of payment commitments entered into by BoS on behalf of any Group Company but not yet debited to that company’s account) the Borrower will deliver or procure delivery of the security detailed in schedule 1.

 

  9.2 Following a Potential Event of Default, the Borrowers will grant such further security to BoS as it may require from time to time and at all times procure that (i) any subsidiary undertaking which is created or is acquired by any Group Company after the date of this letter and (ii) any dormant Group Company commences trading, will grant such security to BoS consistent with the security granted by the Charging Group Companies (other than Thistledove Limited and Holdings) under this letter, all such further security will secure the Loans and any other money owing or incurred to BoS by any Group Company (including contingent liabilities).

 

10. Representations and Warranties

 

The Borrower by signing this letter makes the representations and warranties set out in schedule 2 and repeats each of the representations and warranties set out in paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 10 of schedule 2 on each Interest Payment Date.

 

11. Covenants

 

The Borrower covenants with BoS that from the date of its acceptance of this letter until all the Borrower’s obligations under it have been discharged:

 

  11.1 General Covenants

 

The Borrower will at all times comply and procure compliance by each Group Company with the general covenants set out in schedule 3.

 

  11.2 Financial Information Covenants

 

The Borrower will at all times comply with the financial information covenants set out in schedule 4.

 

6


12. Default and Indemnity

 

  12.1 If any of the events in schedule 5 occurs, BoS may elect to treat the occurrence of that event (while the same is continuing unwaived) as an Event of Default and may by notice in writing to the Borrower:

 

  12.1.1 cancel any part of any Loan then undrawn; and/or

 

  12.1.2 require repayment (immediately or otherwise as BoS may require) of any Loan together with accrued interest; and/or

 

  12.1.3 require that interest is payable on any Loan at the Default Rate; and/or

 

  12.1.4 charge an administration fee to compensate for the additional time spent in administering the Loans (or either of them).

 

  12.2 The Borrower will indemnify (and keep indemnified) BoS on written demand against any loss or expense, including legal fees, which BoS sustains or incurs:

 

  12.2.1 because of a default by any Group Company of any obligation assumed by it under any BoS Document; or

 

  12.2.2 as a consequence of any Event of Default.

 

13. Taxes and Increased Cost

 

  13.1 All payments by the Borrower to BoS (being a Qualifying Bank) under this letter shall be free and without deduction of tax, unless the Borrower is required by law to make a payment subject to deduction or withholding of tax, in which case the amount payable by the Borrower will be sufficiently increased to ensure that BoS receives and retains a net sum equal to that which it would have received and retained were no deduction or withholding made. If BoS subsequently receives a tax credit which is referable to the increased payment and which enhances its position, then it will reimburse the Borrower sufficient to redress the position up to the amount received so long as by so doing it does not prejudice receipt or retention of the tax credit.

 

  13.2 If BoS incurs an Increased Cost, then the Borrower will indemnify it and will promptly pay to BoS the amount BoS certifies as payable. BoS will disclose, in reasonable detail, the basis of its calculation, but not any matter which it considers confidential.

 

  13.3 Without prejudice to the rights of BoS under this clause 13, at any time after receipt of any such demand from BoS in accordance with the provisions of clause 13.2, and so long as the circumstances giving rise to such Increased Cost continue, the Borrower may, upon giving not less than 10 Business Days’ irrevocable notice in writing to BoS, prepay the whole (but not part only) of the Loans, together with all accrued interest thereon and all other sums payable to BoS pursuant to the BoS Documents.

 

14. Payment, Set Off and Interest Calculations

 

  14.1 All payments of principal, interest or commission will be paid to BoS at the Borrower’s branch unless BoS otherwise directs and shall be in cleared sterling funds free of set-off or counterclaim.

 

  14.2 All sums of interest or commission will be calculated on the basis of a year of 365 days and for the actual number of days elapsed following decree or judgment as well as before it.

 

7


  14.3 Any determination by BoS of any amount of principal, interest, commission or charges or an applicable interest rate shall, in the absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence of the relevant amount.

 

  14.4 Where the due date for payment of any sum under any BoS Document is not a Business Day then (without affecting subsequent payment dates) actual payment will be required on the next Business Day unless that day falls in the next calendar month, in which case payment will be on the preceding Business Day.

 

  14.5 The Borrower agrees that any monies from time to time standing to its credit on any account with BoS may be retained as cover for and at any time without notice to the Borrower applied by BoS in or towards payment or satisfaction of any monies or liabilities now or from time to time due, owing or incurred by the Borrower to BoS in whatsoever manner, whether actually or contingently, whether solely or jointly with any other person and whether as principal or surety.

 

  14.6 If BoS exercises any right of set-off in respect of any liability of the Borrower and that liability or any part of it is in a different currency from any credit balance against which BoS seeks to set it off, BoS may use the currency of the credit balance to purchase an amount in the currency of the liability at the then prevailing spot rate of exchange and to pay out of the credit balance all costs, charges and expenses incurred by BoS in connection with that purchase.

 

  14.7 If the Borrower fails to pay any amount due to BoS in Sterling but makes such payment in another optional currency, the Borrower shall indemnify BoS against the full cost incurred by BoS (including all costs, charges and expenses) of converting that payment into Sterling.

 

  14.8 In the event that (1) any currency in which any of the obligations under the BoS Documents are denominated from time to time is changed or replaced at any time after the date of this letter (whether as a result of the introduction of, changeover to or operation of a single or unified European currency or otherwise) and/or (2) any price source for the ECU or the national currency of any European Union member state disappears or is replaced and/or (3) any market conventions relating to the fixing and/or calculation of interest are changed or replaced, the BoS Documents will be amended to the extent that BoS (acting reasonably) considers to be required in order to reflect those circumstances.

 

15. Illegality

 

If, in the opinion of BoS, the introduction of any law or regulation or change in its interpretation, makes it unlawful for BoS to maintain any part of any Loan or carry out any of its obligations in relation to it, then BoS will serve notice to that effect on the Borrower and that notice will release BoS from those obligations. The Borrower will then repay to BoS on its demand, or on whatever later date BoS reasonably specifies, the Loans, together with any other sums payable to BoS under this letter.

 

16. Assignment and Transfer

 

  16.1 This letter is for the benefit of the Borrower and BoS and the successors and assignees and transferees of BoS.

 

  16.2 The Borrower may not assign or transfer all or any part of its rights, obligations or benefits under this letter.

 

  16.3 BoS will be entitled (with the prior consent of the Borrower such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) to (1) assign, novate or transfer and/or (2) permit a participation in all or any part of its rights and obligations under this letter to or by any other Qualifying Bank or Banks. The Borrower undertakes to execute and to procure that each Group Company will execute all documents BoS may reasonably require to give effect to an assignment, novation, transfer or participation. If BoS does enter into a participation arrangement, the Borrower will continue to deal directly with BoS.

 

8


  16.4 BoS will be entitled to disclose to any prospective or actual assignee, transferee or participant, or any other member of the BoS Group, confidential information concerning each Group Company and its financial condition and any other information which may be given to BoS in relation to this letter provided BoS obtains a confidentiality undertaking in respect of such information in favour of the Group confirming that such information shall be used by such prospective or actual assignee, transferee or participant for the purpose of the decision whether to participate in Loans under this letter and PROVIDED further that BoS shall only be entitled to disclose to any other member of the BoS Group such information reasonably required in connection with the offering of any other banking or financing arrangement by any member of the BoS Group to the Group.

 

17. Obligations

 

The obligations of each Borrower in relation to the Loans are joint and several.

 

18. Notices

 

Unless otherwise provided in this letter, all notices or other communications to or between the parties will be in writing and:

 

  18.1 will be by first-class pre-paid post or by fax transmission and if by letter, will be deemed to have been received forty-eight hours after posting (unless hand delivered and then at the time of delivery) and if by fax, when sent (provided a transmission report is received);

 

  18.2 in order to prove that a notice or demand has been made, BoS need only establish that the notice or demand was properly addressed and posted or transmitted;

 

  18.3 if given to BoS, it will be given at the address at the head of this letter or at any other address in the UK which BoS may designate at any time by notice to the Borrower;

 

  18.4 if given to the Borrower, it will be deemed to be duly given if given at the address of the Borrower shown above or at any other UK address the Borrower designates by notice to BoS; and

 

  18.5 BoS may rely upon any communication by telephone or fax or purporting to be on behalf of the Borrower by anyone notified to BoS as being authorised, without enquiry by BoS as to authority or identity. The Borrower agrees to indemnify BoS against any liability incurred or sustained by BoS as a result.

 

19. Press Release

 

The Borrower and BoS shall agree the terms of any public announcement or press release concerning the terms of this letter.

 

20. Waivers and Severability

 

  20.1 No failure or delay by BoS in exercising any right or remedy under any BoS Document shall operate as a waiver, and no single or partial exercise shall prevent further exercise, of any right or remedy.

 

  20.2 If any part of this letter is not valid or enforceable then that shall not affect any other part.

 

  20.3 The schedules referred to in this letter shall form part of this letter.

 

9


21. Fees and Expenses

 

  21.1 The Borrower will pay to BoS an arrangement fee equal to zero point four per cent (0.4%) of the Loans payable upon the execution of this letter and which shall be debited to the current account of the Borrower with BoS.

 

  21.2 The Borrower will pay or reimburse to BoS (on a full indemnity basis) all reasonable legal, accountancy, valuation, due diligence and other fees, costs and expenses or tax charged to or incurred by BoS in connection with the BoS Documents (including the amendment, waiver, enforcement or preservation of the BoS rights) on demand.

 

22. Counterparts

 

This letter may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this letter.

 

23. Third Party Rights

 

A person who is not party to this letter shall have no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of this letter. This clause does not affect any right or remedy of any person which exists or is available otherwise than pursuant to that Act.

 

24. Law

 

This letter will be governed by and construed according to English law and the Borrower submits to the jurisdiction of the English courts.

 

Yours faithfully

  

for and on behalf of

THE GOVERNOR AND COMPANY

OF THE BANK OF SCOTLAND

 

10


Agreed and accepted on behalf of FORBUOYS LIMITED
By         

Director

      

Director/Secretary

Date:

      
Agreed and accepted on behalf of MARTIN RETAIL GROUP LIMITED
By         

Director

      

Director/Secretary

Date:

      
Agreed and accepted on behalf of CLARK RETAIL LIMITED
By         

Director

      

Director/Secretary

Date:

      
Agreed and accepted on behalf of TM VENDING LIMITED
By         

Director

      

Director/Secretary

Date:

      

 

IMPORTANT NOTICE: As with any legally binding agreement, we recommend that you consult your solicitor or other independent legal adviser before accepting this letter.

 

11


[This is the Schedule 1 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated        July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 1

 

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

1. Security

 

  1.1 A first debenture from each Charging Group Company (other than Thistledove Limited and Holdings).

 

  1.2 Guarantees (incorporating set off arrangements) by each Charging Group Company in favour of BoS on account of each other Charging Group Company.

 

  1.3 The Subordination Agreement.

 

2. Financial Information

 

  2.1 The Budget for the Group.

 

  2.2 Financial Statements of each of Thistledove Limited and TM Group Holdings PLC for the period to 24 November 2001 and the Financial Statements of each of the Borrowers and the Charging Group Companies for the period to 25 November 2000.

 

  2.3 The management accounts of the Group for the period to 25 May 2002.

 

3. Refinancing

 

  3.1 Evidence that all Security Rights (other than the Permitted Security Rights and those granted by Marshell Group Limited), granted by any Charging Group Company have been or will be discharged at or before drawdown.

 

  3.2 Details of all bonds, indemnities and guarantees issued by any bank or other person on behalf of any Group Company.

 

4. Administrative/Secretarial

 

  4.1 A Secretary’s Certificate.

 

  4.2 An account mandate in respect of the Borrower.

 

5. Specific Due Diligence Issues

 

Satisfaction with the terms of the High Yield Bonds.

 

6. Arrangement Fee

 

Evidence that the arrangement fee payable by the Borrower pursuant to clause 21 (Fees and Expenses) has been paid.

 

12


[This is the Schedule 2 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 2

 

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

Each Borrower represents and warrants that:

 

1. each Group Company is duly incorporated and validly existing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its incorporation;

 

2. no Group Company has any Borrowings (other than Permitted Borrowings) and no Security Right (other than a Permitted Security Right) exists over the property or assets of any of them;

 

3. no Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing unwaived;

 

4. each Group Company has power to enter into and comply with its obligations in terms of the BoS Documents to which it is party;

 

5. everything has been done (including obtaining any necessary consents) in order (1) for each Group Company to comply with its obligations under the BoS Documents to which they are party and (2) to ensure that those obligations are legally binding;

 

6. execution of, and compliance with, the BoS Documents, to which they are party, does not cause any Group Company to breach:

 

  6.1 any law, regulation, judicial or official order to which it is subject;

 

  6.2 its memorandum or articles of association; or

 

  6.3 (in any material respect) any letter, undertaking or restriction to which it is a party or subject;

 

and will not result in the imposition of any Security Right (other than under a BoS Document) on any of its assets;

 

7. (save for the litigation against James Lancaster and as indemnified by Thistledove Limited and as disclosed to BoS prior to the date of this letter) no Material Litigation is current, or, to its knowledge, pending or threatened against any Group Company or its assets;

 

8. the most recent Financial Statements of the Group delivered to BoS in terms of schedule 1 were prepared in accordance with GAAP and give a true and fair view of the financial condition of the Group at the end of the relevant period;

 

9. there has been no material adverse change in the financial condition of the Group since the most recent Financial Statements;

 

10. the most recent management accounts of the Group delivered to BoS in terms of schedule 1 have been prepared with due care and attention and accurately reflect the financial position of the Group in all material aspects as at their date;

 

11. there has been no material adverse change in the financial condition of the Group since the most recent management accounts;

 

12. the Budget has been prepared with due care and attention and (in the opinion of the Borrowers) is based on assumptions which are reasonable;

 

13


13. the copies of all Certified Copy documents and other documents delivered to BoS are true, accurate and complete in all material respects;

 

14. each Group Company holds all licences and consents (including Environmental Licences) necessary for the ownership of its property and which allow it to comply with the terms of the BoS Documents to which it is party and to conduct its business where failure to do so would have a Material Adverse Effect and has complied in all material respects with those licences and consents and with Environmental Law;

 

15. no Dangerous Substance has been used, disposed of or released at or from any property owned or occupied by a Group Company or, which, in either case, is likely to result in a liability which would have a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

16. each Group Company is either owner or licensee of all material Intellectual Property Rights used in its business and use of them, to the best of the Borrowers’ knowledge and belief, does not infringe any third party rights.

 

14


[This is the Schedule 3 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 3

 

GENERAL COVENANTS

 

1. The Borrower shall, save with the prior written consent of BoS:

 

  1.1 ensure that its obligations in respect of the Loans and the obligations of itself and each other Charging Group Company (other than Thistledove Limited and Holdings) under the Security Documents, at all times rank ahead of all other Borrowings (save for Permitted Security Rights) of each Group Company unless statutorily preferred; and

 

  1.2 ensure that the obligations in respect of the Loans and the obligations of Thistledove Limited and Holdings under the Security Documents, at all times rank at least pari passu with all Borrowings of Thistledove Limited and Holdings unless statutorily preferred; and

 

  1.3 notify BoS of any Event of Default or Potential Event of Default immediately upon becoming aware of it, at the same time describing the steps (if any) being taken to nullify or mitigate its effects.

 

2. The Borrower shall, and shall procure that each other Group Company shall, unless it has a prior written waiver from BoS:

 

  2.1 effect and maintain sufficient and appropriate policies of insurance of its business and assets (reasonable for the type, size and nature of the business carried out by the Group) and supply copies or evidence of them on written demand by BoS;

 

  2.2 advise BoS promptly of any Material Litigation;

 

  2.3 take whatever steps and execute whatever documents BoS may reasonably require in order to give effect to the Security Documents;

 

  2.4 have and maintain all licences and authorisations necessary under any law or regulation affecting the conduct of its business which if not obtained would have a Material Adverse Effect;

 

  2.5 comply with all Statutory Controls and promptly give to BoS a copy of any notice concerning compliance with them which if not complied with would have a Material Adverse Effect;

 

  2.6 preserve its material Intellectual Property Rights and observe all material covenants and stipulations affecting them;

 

  2.7 at the Borrower’s expense, permit BoS to obtain valuations of whatever Group assets which BoS may, at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default or Potential Event of Default, reasonably require;

 

  2.8 on receiving the same, notify BoS of any actual or threatened claim against any Group Company in respect of an alleged breach of Environmental Law or remedial obligation or liability under such law which could, if well-founded, and is reasonably likely to (1) have a Material Adverse Effect or (2) constitute a material liability of that Group Company (which shall be judged reasonably by BoS);

 

  2.9

indemnify BoS, any receiver appointed by BoS and their respective officers, employees and agents against all costs and expenses suffered or incurred by them (PROVIDED THAT in relation to BoS, such indemnity shall relate only to the reasonable costs and expenses suffered

 

15


 

or incurred by BoS) which arise as a result of (1) any actual or threatened breach of Environmental Law, (2) any actual or threatened release of or exposure to a Dangerous Substance on, at or from the premises or operations of any Group Company or (3) any actual or threatened claim referred to in clause 2.8 whether or not such claim has a Material Adverse Effect;

 

  2.10 where environmental harm in terms of the Environmental Protection Act 1990 (as amended by the Environmental Act 1995) has been caused to any property belonging to any Charging Group Company over which BoS has or will have a security interest pursuant to a Security Document, ensure that none of the Group Companies is the “appropriate person” in terms of that Act who has caused or knowingly permitted that harm to occur where this is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect and be aware both of the identity of the appropriate person and of that person’s current financial condition;

 

  2.11 ensure that all proceeds of disposals set out in paragraph 1 of the definition of “Permitted Disposals” are used to acquire replacement assets or property within 270 days of the date of such disposal; and

 

  2.12 on receiving the same, notify BoS of any waiver granted by the holders of the Loan Stock in relation to payments due under the Loan Stock.

 

3. The Borrower shall not, and shall procure that each other Group Company shall not, save with the prior written consent of BoS:

 

  3.1 grant or permit to subsist any Security Right other than a Permitted Security Right;

 

  3.2 incur or contract to incur or permit to subsist any Borrowings other than Permitted Borrowings;

 

  3.3 dispose of or part with control of (whether by a single transaction or a series of transactions) any asset or undertaking (other than a Permitted Disposal);

 

  3.4 make any change to the general nature of the business of the Group from that undertaken at the date of acceptance of this letter;

 

  3.5 lend or give credit to or indemnify (save as disclosed to the Bank prior to the date of this letter) or guarantee any other person(s) unless it is (1) to or on account of the obligations of another Group Company which has granted Full Group Security, (2) in the ordinary course of business on normal trade terms or (3) employee loans of up to £100,000 in aggregate PROVIDED THAT in relation to Thistledove Limited such provision shall only apply to indemnities granted in relation to Borrowings;

 

  3.6 join any partnership or joint venture with any other person or amalgamate with any other person (other than as part of a solvent reconstruction with the prior written consent of BoS);

 

  3.7 acquire any company or business (or any shares in any company) the value of which is in excess of £2,000,000 PROVIDED THAT the aggregate value of all such acquisitions in any Accounting Reference Period shall not exceed £5,000,000;

 

  3.8 alter the accounting principles and practices applied in its Financial Statements (unless to comply with GAAP or on the advice of its auditors);

 

  3.9 alter its Accounting Reference Period;

 

  3.10 enter an arrangement for finance not shown in its balance sheet as Borrowings;

 

  3.11 factor or discount its debts.

 

16


4. The Borrower shall not, and shall procure that each other Group Company which is not a wholly owned Subsidiary shall not, save with the prior written consent of BoS, make any Distribution other than strictly in accordance with the Articles of Association, nor any payment in respect of the High Yield Bonds except to the extent that the same constitutes a Permitted Transaction, unless:

 

  (a) no Financial Default has occurred and is continuing (which has not been expressly waived in writing by BoS; and

 

  (b) no Financial Default would occur as a result of such Distribution or payment under the High Yield Bonds being made.

 

17


[This is the Schedule 4 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 4

 

FINANCIAL INFORMATION COVENANTS

 

Each Borrower covenants that it will supply to BoS:

 

1. within 10 months after the end of each financial year of each Borrower, two copies of its Financial Statements and within 150 days after the end of each financial year, two copies of the Financial Statements for Thistledove Limited and Holdings;

 

2. within 15 days before the commencement of each financial year of the Borrowers, its annual budget (including profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash flow forecasts) for the next financial year and a consolidated annual budget for the Group;

 

3. within 35 days after the end of each month in each financial year of the Borrower, management accounts (including profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash flow statements) on a consolidated basis for the Group and showing a comparison with budget together with commentary by the finance director on all material aspects of those management accounts;

 

4. such further financial information as BoS may from time to time reasonably require.

 

18


[This is the Schedule 5 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 5

 

EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

1. The Borrower fails to pay any sum due under a BoS Document on its due date other than as a result of the failure of the appropriate payment transmission system which is outside the control of the Borrower and such sum is not paid within three Business Days of the relevant due date, provided that, where a demand for repayment of the Overdraft is made in circumstances where no Event of Default has occurred, the Borrower shall be deemed not to be in default under the provisions of this paragraph 1 of schedule 5, unless it has failed to repay the Overdraft so demanded within 10 Business Days of demand being made; or

 

2. any written information or projection given or any representation, warranty or statement made or repeated by or on behalf of any Group Company under the BoS Documents (whether before or after the date of this letter) is incorrect, inaccurate, incomplete or, in the opinion of BoS, misleading in any material respect and which, if capable of remedy, is not remedied within 14 days of the earlier of (1) such Group Company becoming aware that such written information or projection given or such representation, warranty or statement made or repeated is incorrect, inaccurate or incomplete and (2) BoS notifying the Borrower in writing that such written information or projection given or such representation, warranty or statement made or repeated is incorrect, inaccurate or misleading; or

 

3. any Borrowings in excess of £100,000 of any Group Company are not paid when due for payment (whether because of acceleration or otherwise) (save for payments due under the Loan Stock but waived in writing by the holders of the Loan Stock) or within any originally permitted period of grace or any creditor of all or any of the Group Companies becomes entitled to declare any such Borrowings to be accelerated prior to their stated maturity; or

 

4. the Borrower fails to comply with the terms of schedule 2 or schedule 4 or any Group Company (to the extent applicable) fails to comply with the terms of any of paragraphs 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 4 of schedule 3; or

 

5. any Group Company fails to comply with any other covenant, undertaking or obligation given or owed by it under a BoS Document which is not remedied to the satisfaction of BoS within 14 days after the first of (1) a Group Company being aware of the failure or (2) notice by BoS calling for its remedy (should BoS reasonably consider it to be remediable); or

 

6. Holdings or Thistledove Limited (in relation to the Loan Stock) breaches any event of default (howsoever defined in the relevant document) under the High Yield Bonds, the Mezzanine Bonds or the Loan Stock; or

 

7. Holdings fails to pay any interest due under the High Yield Bonds and such failure continues for a period of 20 days or more; or

 

8. Holdings fails to pay any principal or premium (if any) due in respect of the High Yield Bonds and the failure continues for a period of 2 days or more; or

 

9. any Charging Group Company ceases or threatens to cease to carry on its business or a significant part of it (unless as part of a solvent reconstruction approved by BoS) or suspends or threatens to suspend payment of its debts or is unable or is deemed to be unable to pay its debts within the meaning of Section 123 (1) of the Insolvency Act 1986; or

 

10.

a proposal is made or a nominee or supervisor is appointed for any Charging Group Company for a composition in satisfaction of its debt or for a scheme of arrangement of its affairs or other arrangement

 

19


 

or any proceedings for the benefit of its creditors are commenced under any law, regulation or procedure relating to the reconstruction or readjustment of debt; or

 

11. a petition is made for an administration order under the Insolvency Act 1986 with respect to any Charging Group Company; or

 

12. any steps are taken by a Charging Group Company (without BoS prior written consent) or any other person to wind up or dissolve any Charging Group Company or to appoint a liquidator, trustee, receiver, administrative receiver or similar officer to any Charging Group Company or any part of its undertaking or assets; or

 

13. any legal process for an amount in excess of £100,000 is not discharged within 14 days (not being reasonably considered by BoS to be defensible or vexatious, in good faith) is levied, enforced or sued against a Group Company or its assets or any person validly takes possession of any of the property or assets of a Group Company or steps are taken by any person to enforce any Security Right against any of the property or assets of a Group Company; or

 

14. any event occurs or proceedings are taken in respect of a Charging Group Company in any jurisdiction to which it is subject which has an effect equivalent or similar to any of the events mentioned in paragraphs 10 to 13 (inclusive) of this schedule 5; or

 

15. any part of a BoS Document ceases to be legal or effective (or a Group Company so alleges) or any consent required to enable a Charging Group Company to perform its obligations under a BoS Document ceases to have effect; or

 

16. notice of withdrawal or discontinuance of any guarantee or security provided by any third party (including any Charging Group Company) is served on BoS and a replacement guarantor suitable to BoS cannot be found within seven days of receipt of such notice; or

 

17. any licence, authority, permit, consent, agreement or contract which is material to the business from time to time of any Group Company is terminated, withheld or modified which, in the opinion of BoS, will have a Material Adverse Effect; or

 

18. in the reasonable opinion of BoS at any time after the date of this letter:

 

  18.1 there is a risk of material liability to BoS under Environmental Law because it has made loans or because it has taken security (direct or third party) for the Loans; or

 

  18.2 the value of any asset of any Group Company may be diminished because of Environmental Law so as to have a Material Adverse Effect; or

 

  18.3 any Group Company does not comply with regulations or the law applicable to its business or with Environmental Law or Licence(s) which failure to comply will have a Material Adverse Effect; or

 

19. the auditors of the Borrower qualify any Financial Statements, except where BoS is of the reasonable opinion that such qualification is of a technical nature and not material; or

 

20. any other circumstance or event occurs or arises which will have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20


[This is the Schedule 6 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Clark Retail Limited and TM Vending Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 6

 

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

“Accounting Reference Period” has the meaning ascribed thereto in section 224 of the Companies Act 1985.

 

“Articles of Association” means the articles of association of the relevant Borrower.

 

“Borrowings” means (without double counting):

 

1. money borrowed or raised and includes capitalised interest;

 

2. any liability under any bond, note, debenture, loan stock, redeemable preference share capital or other instrument or security;

 

3. any liability for acceptance or documentary credits or discounted instruments;

 

4. any liability for the acquisition cost of assets or services payable on deferred payment terms where the period of deferment is more than 90 days where for the purpose of raising finance not on ordinary course of business instalment terms;

 

5. any liability under debt purchase, factoring and similar agreements and capital amounts owing under finance leases, hire purchase or conditional sale agreements or arrangements; and

 

6. any liability under any guarantee or indemnity (except product warranties).

 

“BoS” means The Governor and Company of the Bank of Scotland and its successors, assignees and transferees permitted under this letter.

 

“BoS Document(s)” means this letter, the Security Documents, the Subordination Agreement and all documents executed by the Group Company supplemental to any of them.

 

“BoS Group” means BoS, any Subsidiary of it, any holding company of it and any Subsidiary of its holding company.

 

“Business Day” means a day when the branch of BoS at which the Borrower’s account is located is open for business.

 

“Budget” means the first quarter reforecast for 2002 (including any schedules and appendices thereto) in respect of the Group.

 

“Certified Copy” means a copy certified as true, complete and up to date by the specified person or, if no-one is specified, by either the secretary of the relevant Group Company or the solicitors to the Borrower.

 

“Change of Control” means if 50% or more of the equity share capital of the Borrower becomes beneficially owned by any one person or by any group of persons acting in concert (not being persons who own shares in the Borrower at the date of this letter.

 

“Charging Group Company” means Thistledove Limited, Holdings, the Borrowers, TOG Limited, Bracklands Limited and Marshell Group Limited and any other Group Company which enters into Full Group Security in favour of BoS;

 

“Dangerous Substances” means any substances capable of causing harm to man or any other living organism or damaging the environment.

 

21


“Default Rate” means the rate which is one per cent (1%) per annum over the rate at which interest is paid on the Revolving Credit under clause 3.5.2.

 

“Distribution” means any dividend, redemption or distribution of assets by a company to its members whether in cash or otherwise on account of capital or income.

 

“Environmental Law” means all laws, regulations, directives, codes of practice, circulars, guidance notices and court decisions (whether in the UK or elsewhere) concerning the protection of human health or welfare or the environment or the conditions of the work place or the generation, transportation, storage, treatment or disposal of Dangerous Substances.

 

“Environmental Licence” means any licence, authorisation or approval required by Environmental Law.

 

“Event of Default” means an event set out in schedule 5 which BoS elects to treat as such.

 

“Final Repayment Date” means, in respect of the Revolving Credit, the date falling 364 days after the date of this letter.

 

“Financial Default” means any Financial Event of Default or Financial Potential Default.

 

“Financial Event of Default” means any of the Events of Default set out in paragraphs 1, 3 and 4 and paragraphs 6 to 11 (inclusive) of schedule 5.

 

“Financial Potential Default” means any event, act or condition which, with the giving of notice and/or lapse of time, and/or any other event, act or condition which, in the reasonable opinion of BoS, will or is likely to constitute a Financial Event of Default.

 

“Financial Statements” means the audited annual profit and loss account and balance sheet of the relevant company for each of its financial years (consolidated for each financial year during which that company has a subsidiary) together with related directors’ and auditors’ reports.

 

“Flotation” means the inclusion of any part of the share capital of the Borrower or any other Group Company in the Official List of the London Stock Exchange Limited, or the admission of the same to trading on the Alternative Investment Market or any recognised investment exchange (as that term is defined in the Financial Services Act 1986) or in or on any exchange or market replacing the same.

 

“Full Group Security” means guarantees in favour of BoS from each Charging Group Company on account of the obligations of each other Charging Group Company to BoS and, if applicable, any other security which BoS may require pursuant to clause 9.

 

“GAAP” means generally accepted accounting principles in the UK.

 

“Group” means Thistledove Limited (a company registered in England and Wales under company number 3649523), Holdings and each of its Subsidiaries and “Group Company” is construed accordingly.

 

“High Yield Bonds” means the 121/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 15 May 2008 constituted by an indenture made between Holdings and Bankers Trust Company, London Branch and dated 14 May 1998 and the 11% Senior Notes due 15 May 2008 constituted by an indenture made between Holdings and Bankers Trust Company, London Branch and dated 14 May 1998 having initial principal amounts of £55,000,000 and $175,000,000 respectively.

 

“Holdings” means TM Group Holdings PLC registered in England and Wales under company number 3462566 whose registered address is at TM House, Ashwells Road, Pilgrims Hatch, Essex CM15 9ST.

 

“Increased Cost” means:

 

1. an additional or increased cost incurred by BoS as a result of it having entered into, or performing, maintaining or funding its obligations under this letter; or

 

22


2. that portion of an additional or increased cost incurred by BoS in making, funding or maintaining all or any advances comprised in a class of advances formed by or including any Loan; or

 

3. a reduction in any amount payable to BoS or in the effective return to BoS under any Loan or on its capital; or

 

4. the foregone amount of any payment made or interest or other return on or calculated by reference to any amount received or receivable by BoS under any Loan,

 

in each case arising as a result of any change, introduction, interpretation or administration of any law or regulation after the date of this letter or any compliance after the date of this letter with any law or regulation relating to reserve assets, special deposits, cash ratios, liquidity or capital adequacy requirements or any other form of banking or monetary control (including, without limitation, controls and requirements of the Bank of England, the Financial Services Authority, the European Central Bank or any other governmental or regulatory authority) or the introduction or changeover to or operation of a single European currency but excluding (1) costs compensated for by the Mandatory Liquid Asset Costs or (2) payments in respect of tax under clause 10.1 of this letter or (3) costs not generally applicable to U.K. banks.

 

“Intellectual Property Rights” means patents, patent applications, trade marks, community trade marks, service marks, trade names, brand names, registered designs, copyright and all other industrial and intellectual property rights.

 

“Interest Payment Date” means the last Business Day of each Interest Period, unless its duration is more than three months in which case it will also be the last Business Day of each consecutive three month period.

 

“Interest Period” means each period selected under clause 3.5 and to which a rate of interest calculated by reference to that clause applies.

 

“LIBOR” means the rate (expressed as an annual percentage rate) at which Sterling deposits in an amount equal to the Revolving Credit are offered to BoS in the London Inter Bank Market by prime banks, selected by BoS, at or about 11 am on the first Business Day of an Interest Period for the same period and amount in Sterling.

 

“Loan Stock” means the £21,838,236 7% unsecured subordinated loan stock due 2008 of Thistledove Limited.

 

“Mandatory Liquid Asset Costs” means the costs (expressed as an annual percentage at a rate rounded up to the nearest one eighth per cent) calculated by BoS in accordance with its usual practice of complying with any reserve asset and/or special deposit and/or cash ratio and/or liquidity and/or banking control or similar requirements of the Bank of England, the Financial Services Authority, the European Central Bank or any other governmental or regulatory authority.

 

“Margin” means one point two five per cent (1.25%) per annum.

 

“Material Adverse Effect” means any effect, event, circumstance or change which, in the reasonable opinion of BoS, might:

 

1. affect the ability of any Charging Group Company to comply with its material obligations under a BoS Document;

 

2. materially and adversely affect the business, assets or financial condition of the Group as a whole; or

 

3. (where the context so admits) result in any of the Security Documents not being legal, valid and binding on, and enforceable substantially in accordance with its terms against any party to that Security Document or not providing BoS with enforceable security over the assets to be covered by it.

 

“Material Litigation” means, at any time, the aggregate of all litigation, arbitration or administrative proceeding raised or threatened against, or defended by or judgment outstanding in relation to any Group

 

23


Company, which is reasonably likely to be adversely determined and, if so determined would have a Material Adverse Effect and which is to be reported in detail by the Borrower to BoS.

 

“Mezzanine Bonds” means the £30,000,000 senior floating notes due 2008 constituted by an indenture dated 25 February 1999 and made between Holdings as issuer and Banker’s Trust Company as trustee.

 

“Notice of Drawdown” means a written notice in the form set out in schedule 7 requesting drawdown of the Revolving Credit.

 

“Permitted Borrowings” means:

 

1. the Revolving Credit and amounts due in respect of it;

 

2. the Overdraft and amounts due in respect of it;

 

3. the Mezzanine Bonds and the Loan Stock;

 

4. Borrowings between Charging Group Companies and Borrowings between Group Companies notified to BoS prior to the date of this letter;

 

5. commitments of members of the Group under finance lease, hire purchase or conditional sale agreements or arrangements which do not at any time exceed £1,000,000 in aggregate;

 

6. the High Yield Bonds; and

 

7. Borrowings incurred by Thistledove Limited or Holdings.

 

“Permitted Disposals” means:

 

1. the disposal of assets on an arm’s length basis in the ordinary and usual course of trading (which shall include the disposal (including cash) of individual retail shops and freehold properties to the extent that each such disposal does not exceed £500,000 PROVIDED THAT the aggregate amount of such disposals in any Accounting Reference Period does not exceed £5,000,000) for any purpose not otherwise permitted by this letter;

 

2. disposals between Group Companies where the transferee has granted Full Group Security;

 

3. disposals where the proceeds are applied towards the acquisition of replacement assets within the business within 270 days of the disposal; and

 

4. disposals made other than in the ordinary and usual course of trading and not referred to in paragraphs 1 to 3 above but on an arm’s length basis and only if the value of the assets disposed of (whether by a single or several transaction) when taken together with all similar disposals made by the Group is not in total more than £2,000,000.

 

“Permitted Security Rights” means (1) liens and rights of set-off securing obligations which are not overdue beyond their standard payment dates, arising by operation of law or on contractual terms with suppliers in the ordinary and usual course of trading, (2) Security Rights arising by operation of law or out of title retention provisions in a supplier’s conditions of supply of goods acquired in the ordinary and usual course of trading, (3) Security Rights arising out of interest rate or currency hedging arrangements, (4) Security Rights arising as part of letter of credit transactions, (5) rent deposits as part of leases in the ordinary and usual course of business, (6) Security Rights arising from court costs, orders or assessments by authorities where contested in good faith and (7) Security Rights granted in terms of the BoS Documents or with the prior written approval of BoS.

 

“Permitted Transactions” means:

 

1. the redemption by Holdings of the Mezzanine Bonds;

 

24


2. the redemption by Thistledove Limited of the Loan Stock; and

 

3. the declaration and payment of up to £26,000,000 in aggregate of dividends and intercompany loans by Holdings during July 2002 or on such other date as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter or which in the determination of Holdings the same is permitted under the High Yield Bonds.

 

“Potential Event of Default” means any event, act or condition which, with the giving of notice and/or lapse of time (in each case as specified in Schedule 5), and/or any other event, act or condition which, in the reasonable opinion of BoS, will or is likely to constitute an Event of Default.

 

“Qualifying Bank” means a bank for the purposes of Section 840A of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 which is within the charge to UK corporation tax as regards any interest payable to it under or in connection with this letter and/or any other BoS Document at the time when such interest is paid.

 

“Revolving Credit Advance” means the principal amount of an advance made, or to be made, available to the Borrower under the Revolving Credit in accordance with clause 3.

 

“Rollover Advance” means a Revolving Credit Advance which is used to refinance a maturing Revolving Credit Advance and which is in the same amount as such maturing Revolving Credit Advance and is to be drawn on the day such maturing Revolving Credit Advance is to be repaid.

 

“Sale” means any transaction pursuant to which all or substantially all of the assets of the Borrower or of the Group are sold to any person (other than a member of the Group).

 

“Secretary’s Certificate” means a certificate in the form set out in schedule 8, executed by the secretary of the Borrower.

 

“Security Documents” means the documents listed under the heading of Security in schedule 1, and any other security granted to BoS by the Group.

 

“Security Right” means any mortgage, charge, security, pledge, lien, right of set-off, right to retention of title or other encumbrance, whether fixed or floating, over any present or future property, assets or undertaking.

 

“Standard Application Dates” means the last business day in each month or such other dates as BoS may advise the Borrower from time to time.

 

“Statutory Control” means each of the following which affects any Group Company or any of its assets from time to time:

 

1. any legislation (including delegated legislation);

 

2. any consent made or given under any legislation; and

 

3. any notice, order or correspondence related to paragraphs 1 or 2 above and having the force of law.

 

“Sterling” and the figure “£” shall mean the lawful currency of the UK.

 

“Subordination Agreement” means the subordination agreement dated on or about the date hereof and made between the Charging Group Companies and BoS.

 

“Subsidiary” and “holding company” shall have the meanings given to them in Section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 (including any Subsidiary acquired after the date of this Letter) and “Subsidiaries” shall mean all or any of them, as appropriate.

 

25


Interpretation

 

Any reference in this letter to:

 

(1) statutes, statutory provisions and other legislation shall include all amendments, substitutions, modifications and re-enactments for the time being in force.

 

(2) control” of any company shall be interpreted in accordance with Section 840 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988.

 

(3) including” shall not be construed as limiting the generality of the words preceding it.

 

References to clauses, paragraphs and schedules are to be construed, unless otherwise stated, as references to clauses, paragraphs and schedules of this letter.

 

Any term or phrase defined in the Companies Act 1985 (as amended from time to time) shall bear the same meaning in this letter.

 

Any references in this letter to words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words denoting any gender shall include all genders.

 

References to this letter and to any provisions of it or to any other document referred to in this letter shall be construed as references to it in force for the time being and as amended, varied, supplemented, restated, substituted or novated from time to time.

 

References to a person are to be construed to include references to a corporation, firm, company, partnership, joint venture, unincorporated body of persons, individual or any state or any agency of a state, whether or not a separate legal entity.

 

References to any person are to be construed to include that person’s assignees or transferees or successors in title, whether direct or indirect.

 

Clause headings are for ease of reference only and are not to affect the interpretation of this letter.

 

26


[This is the Schedule 7 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited and Clark Retail Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 7

 

BoS STYLE NOTICE OF DRAWDOWN

 

[*Limited Headed Paper]

 

To: Bank of Scotland

PO Box 39900

Level 7, Bishopsgate Exchange

155 Bishopsgate

London

EC2M 3YB

 

Date:

 

As required under clause 1 of the facility letter dated * 2002 (the “Letter”) from you to ourselves as borrower(s) in respect of revolving credit facilities of £15,000,000, we now give you notice of our intention to drawdown under the Revolving Credit as follows:

 

1. Date of Drawdown: *.

 

2. Amount: £*.

 

3. Duration of first Interest Period: * months.

 

4. Payment instructions:

 

We confirm that:

 

  4.1 the matters represented by us and set out in schedule 2 and to be repeated by clause 6 of the Letter are true and accurate on the date of this notice as if made on that date;

 

  4.2 no Event of Default or (unless this is a Rollover Advance) Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing or would result from the proposed drawdown; and

 

  4.3 the amount specified in paragraph 2 should be credited to account number *.

 

Words and expressions in this notice shall bear the same meaning as in the Letter.

 

    

Director/Secretary

 

27


[This is the Schedule 8 referred to in the preceding facility agreement between BoS and Forbuoys Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited and Clark Retail Limited dated         July 2002.]

 

SCHEDULE 8

 

BoS STYLE COMPANY SECRETARY’S CERTIFICATE

 

[* Limited Headed paper]

 

To: Bank of Scotland

PO Box 39900

Level 7, Bishopsgate Exchange

155 Bishopsgate

London

EC2M 3YB

 

Re: * Limited/plc (the “Company”)

Registered Office: * [insert details]

Registered Number: * [insert details]

 

Revolving Credit Facilities of £15,000,000 and Overdraft of £5,000,000 (the “Facilities”)

 

I, * [insert full name], the Company Secretary do hereby certify that:

 

(1) the Company has the necessary power to borrow and to incur the liabilities specified on the letter(s) from BoS dated * offering the Facilities (the “Letter(s)”) and to draw down the Facilities;

 

(2) no borrowing limit of the Company will be exceeded by any borrowing under the Letter(s);

 

(3) the Board of Directors of the Company has duly authorised * and * [insert full names of those authorised] to accept the Letter(s), to draw down the Facilities and to execute all documentation necessary to complete the security specified in schedule 1 of the Letter(s) (the “Security”);

 

(4) the individuals referred to in paragraph 3 above were at the time of execution of the documentation referred to above and remain duly appointed * [directors] [authorised signatories] of the Company;

 

(5) the board of directors and, where necessary, the shareholders of the Company have resolved that the granting of the Security is for the commercial benefit of the Company;

 

(6) the resolutions giving the authorisations referred to above were validly passed at a properly convened meeting of the board of directors of the Company and, as the case may be, at a properly convened meeting of the shareholders of the Company and are in full force and effect; [and

 

(7) * [insert Directors names] declared * [his/her/their] interest in any contracts, arrangements or dealings between the Company and * [list relevant companies of which he/she/they are also Directors] to the Board of Directors, as required under section 317 of the Companies Act 1985].

 

I attach (1) a list of all the directors of the Company and confirm that those persons listed are all the directors of the Company as at the date of this certificate and (2) a copy of the Certificate of Incorporation [and each Certificate(s) of Incorporation on Change of Name] of the Company and confirm each copy is true, complete and up to date.

 

This certificate is authorised by the Board of Directors of the Company.

 

  

Company Secretary

 

Date: *

 

28

EX-8 4 dex8.htm LIST OF PRINCIPAL SUBSIDIARIES List of Principal Subsidiaries

Exhibit 8

 

List of Principal Subsidiaries

 

Name of company   

Trading name
(if applicable)


  

Country of
registration (or
incorporation) and
operation


  

Holding


   Proportion
of voting
rights and
shares held


 

Nature of

business


Bracklands Ltd*

   N/a    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%   Property Co

Clark Retail Ltd*

   TM Retail    Scotland    Ordinary shares    100%   Retailing

Dillons Stores Ltd*

   TM Retail    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%   Retailing

Forbuoys Ltd

   TM Retail    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%   Retailing

Martin Retail Group Ltd*

   TM Retail    Scotland    Ordinary shares    100%   Retailing

TM Vending Ltd

   N/a    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%   Corporate Activities

Tog Ltd*

   N/a    England and Wales    Ordinary shares    100%   Intermediate Holding Co

 

* 100% held by a subsidiary undertaking

 

EX-12.1 5 dex121.htm SECTION 302 CERTIFICATE, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER Section 302 Certificate, Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 12.1

 

Section 302 Certificate, Chief Executive Officer

 

CERTIFICATION

 

I, James Lancaster, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of TM Group Holdings PLC;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the company and have:

 

  a) designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  c) disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarise and report financial information; and

 

  b) any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have, or are reasonably likely to have, a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

By:   /s/    JAMES LANCASTER        

Name:

  James Lancaster

Title:

  Chief Executive Officer

 

Date: March 23, 2005

 

EX-12.2 6 dex122.htm SECTION 302 CERTIFICATE, CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER Section 302 Certificate, Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 12.2

 

Section 302 Certificate, Chief Financial Officer

 

CERTIFICATION

 

I, Jonathan Miller, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of TM Group Holdings PLC;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the company and have:

 

  a) designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  c) disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarise and report financial information; and

 

  b) any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have, or are reasonably likely to have, a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

By:   /s/    JONATHAN MILLER        

Name:

  Jonathan Miller

Title:

  Chief Financial Officer

 

Date: March 23, 2005

 

EX-13.1 7 dex131.htm SECTION 906 CERTIFICATE, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER Section 906 Certificate, Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 13.1

 

Section 906 Certificate, Chief Executive Officer

 

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

In connection with the Annual Report of TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended November 27, 2004, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Annual Report”), I, James Lancaster, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to the best of my knowledge:

 

(1) The Annual Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

(2) The information contained in the Annual Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

By:   /s/    JAMES LANCASTER        

Name:

  James Lancaster

Title:

  Chief Executive Officer

 

Date: March 23, 2005

 

EX-13.2 8 dex132.htm SECTION 906 CERTIFICATE, CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER Section 906 Certificate, Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 13.2

 

Section 906 Certificate, Chief Financial Officer

 

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

In connection with the Annual Report of TM Group Holdings PLC (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended November 27, 2004, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Annual Report”), I, Jonathan Miller, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that, to the best of my knowledge:

 

(3) The Annual Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

(4) The information contained in the Annual Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

By:   /s/    JONATHAN MILLER        

Name:

  Jonathan Miller

Title:

  Chief Financial Officer

 

Date: March 23, 2005

 

GRAPHIC 9 g1204912049_img001.jpg GRAPHIC begin 644 g1204912049_img001.jpg M_]C_X``02D9)1@`!`0$`8`!@``#_X0!X17AI9@``24DJ``@````&`#$!`@`1 M````5@````$#!0`!````:`````,#`0`!`````._)`A!1`0`!`````0"\`Q%1 M!``!````Q`X``!)1!``!````Q`X```````!-:6-R;W-O9G0@3V9F:6-E``:@ MA@$`C[$``/_;`$,`"`8&!P8%"`<'!PD)"`H,%`T,"PL,&1(3#Q0=&A\>'1H< M'"`D+B<@(BPC'!PH-RDL,#$T-#0?)SD].#(\+C,T,O_;`$,!"0D)#`L,&`T- M&#(A'"$R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R,C(R M,C(R,C(R,C(R,O_``!$(`!D`Z0,!(@`"$0$#$0'_Q``?```!!0$!`0$!`0`` M`````````0(#!`4&!P@)"@O_Q`"U$``"`0,#`@0#!04$!````7T!`@,`!!$% M$B$Q008346$'(G$4,H&1H0@C0K'!%5+1\"0S8G*""0H6%Q@9&B4F)R@I*C0U M-CH.$A8:'B(F* MDI.4E9:7F)F:HJ.DI::GJ*FJLK.TM;:WN+FZPL/$Q<;'R,G*TM/4U=;7V-G: MX>+CY.7FY^CIZO'R\_3U]O?X^?K_Q``?`0`#`0$!`0$!`0$!`````````0(# M!`4&!P@)"@O_Q`"U$0`"`0($!`,$!P4$!``!`G<``0(#$00%(3$&$D%1!V%Q M$R(R@0@40I&AL<$)(S-2\!5B7J"@X2%AH>(B8J2DY25EI>8 MF9JBHZ2EIJ>HJ:JRL[2UMK>XN;K"P\3%QL?(RKR\_3U]O?X^?K_V@`,`P$``A$#$0`_`/2KR\U)-9C8W$$GV8F)KD0L%C+\ M`,,\].WK3->O=1TSQ]X2B349O(O_`+1%=P<>4^R+<&`QE3GWKMMJ\\#GKQ7G MGQ"TZTU3QIX'M+^+S;.6YN5D0D@,?*R%..QQT[T`=W::A97^_P"QWEO<;#A_ M)E5]I]#@\4VXU33[.=(+F^M8)I/N1RS*K-]`3DUYWKFEV/A?XF^$9?#]E!92 MWXN8+N"UC"+-$L88%E''![USO@RUF\1>$KF]OO!$>N7.IS3&ZOYKN$.QWE0J M[_F0*``!VQF@#VTW$(N!;F:,3$;A'N&XCUQUJ.*^LYV*PW4$A#;2$D!Y]..] M>,7_`(;U!K/X<:3XC7R]1%Y+;3RQRYD>!58A#(O)!3`//,8$ MT1_X^&)[@>:H'^Z:U;^W@U[2/B#XBGCCGA:VEL+,N`P$<"-EESZR%CG_`&10 M!Z+87;FS@COY[4:@L"O2#1=.U?Q#\-H+^TCFCGT64S*>/-VQ1E0Y'W@/0\5NKI.GZ!\9M)BTBR@ ML8KO29_/CMD$:R%77:2HXR/6@#K))[B'QC;VRW$AMY[5Y&B;!4,I`!'I6J]W M;1S"%[B)93T1G`)_"L+4I&B\76TB#+II\S*/4@BL;2;1]1\-AGT(7?VM;QPM;?9=C&=6;]YG^'`]*L27=M#(LT@17$BQW$CQRQ<;2`I.?K6M%[L[:P\5:*UG;Q0>:)HW\I0NY0N0 M#CKS0!J:3J\6J6[2;5B<2O'L+@D[3C-6S=VPG\@W$0F/_+/>-WY5R6EQ16_A M;4M1AMHC>Q27+)+L!<$$]^M3PZ+II\$^:\,;2O:^>UR1^\\S;NW;NNM-AN8+@$P31R@<'8P;'Y5Q<4,>K:AX9>_B$CSVT6S@C@2:SD\Q8E"AL$8R!0!O/>6L;2J]S"K1+ND!D`*#U M/H*+2^M+^'SK.Z@N8LXWPR!QGZBO.O%6@:;J_P`8O#D5[:1R1/8W$DR%>)BA M7:'_`+P!P<'CBJNM+'X0^)B/H%M%;+>:)=37-K`@6-GB!:-]HXSGC-`'I;ZG MI\5ZME)?6R7;?=@:90Y^BYS5&>YU8^*[2WM9-/.E"!S=HSG[0'_@VCIM^M>? M:+X9T+4?@NVJ7]M!/J%W8R7L^HR`&;S\%MWF=05(`'/&*ATV675O$OP[OY6" M7U]H=SY]RH`=F\I,$GO@\\T`>JIJFGR79^&;>V\)WFE:!XI\,VL=RLQBL-=@C5TN9#G&]OO M)(V3P>IJ3P)X2\/ZCJ7BR>^T>TN6AURXAB6:(.D:84X5#\J]>PH`]026.6(2 MQR*\;#<'4@@CUS5>UU33[YY$M+ZVN&C^^(9E37_#]_HW@FWT.2QNE%Q-%=0`26I!# MQE4^]V(SZ4`>F-J5BMN+AKVW$);:)#*NTGTSG&:M5Y-X+\'Z+JGBKQG-J&GP M7,%OJQCM[>1`8H3M4LRIT#'Y><9XKUF@!*R?$'AVQ\26,=M>^:C0RK-!/`^R M6"1>CHW8]:UZ*`.;T?P=::7JS:M_&35)O MA[9PZA=7.E:QK&D1W^,5V-%`&)<>%["ZFT669[EY M-(B@#G['P;HVG^ M#G\+0PO_`&8\3Q,K-EF#Y+$GUYZU+;>%M,L_")\,PI(NG&W:V(W_`#E6!W'/ MJF6][HMVGG>;H]LUK:Y?C8RA3N]3A15F?0;*X\1VFNOYGVV MU@>"/#?+M<@G(]>*U**`*CZ?!)J<6H-N\^*-HEYXVDY/'X5G)X:@@DD^R7U] M:0R,6:"&4!,GKC(R/PKL9[K= MJ$\>]RTEC%.P$C]\(.>?;BNMHH`YS0-$"Z+I#7<;QW%H7E1,XVEL\$?0UL7& MGPW-[:W9^[+'KQCH?3 M-0?\(M:^4;875X+$G/V02_N\9SCIG'MFMZB@"D^EVSWUI=[2LEJC)$%.%`(P M>/PITFGP2:G#J#;O/BC:-<'C!QGC\*MT4`>;^+M%CUOXJ>'8)FNXD73[IEN+ M:1HWB<%,$,.A^O%=%H?@JQT;5+C59KR^U34IXO(-U?R!V6+.=B@``#/7CFNF MHH`X9/A3X<1IHP^H_P!GR,SC33>-]E1FSEECZ=3D9R`>U:]IX+TFRFT66+[1 MNT:V>UMZUC5[ZVLIA/;6EU@X'%:E%`',MX$T*71-2TB: M"26TU"[>\E#R'
-----END PRIVACY-ENHANCED MESSAGE-----